Product Information

 Product Model: S12 Vet

 Product Name: Veterinary monitor
 Manufacturer Name: Guangdong Biolight Meditech Co., Ltd.
 After Service Contact Information:
Address: No.2 Innovation First Road, Technical Innovation Coast, Hi-tech
Zone, Zhuhai, P.R. China
Fax: +86-756-3399919
Post code: 519085
Toll-free consultation hot line: +86-400-8818-233

Revision History
This manual has a revision number. This revision number changes whenever the
manual is updated due to software or technical specification change. Contents of this
manual are subject to change without prior notice.
 Document No.: J/S-I-019
 Revision number:V1.0
 Release time: 2022.04
Copyright © 2022 Guangdong Biolight Meditech Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

Statement
Guangdong Biolight Meditech Co., Ltd. (hereinafter called Biolight) holds the
copyright of this manual, and we are also entitled to deal with this manual as confidential
files. This manual is only used for operation, maintenance and service of product,
someone else can not publish the manual.
This manual contains exclusive information protected by copyright laws and we reserve
its copyright. Without written approval of manufacturer no parts of this manual shall be
photocopied, Xeroxed or translated into other languages.
The contents contained in this manual are subject to amendments without notification.

I
Manufacturer's Responsibility
Only under the following circumstances will manufacturer be responsible for the safety,
reliability and performance of the instrument:
 All the installation, expansion, readjustment, renovation or repairs are conducted by
the personnel certified by manufacturer.
 All the replaced components, assorted accessories and consumables involved in
maintenance are original or approved by Biolight.
 The storage condition, operation condition and electrical status of the instrument
conform to the product specification. The electrical installation of the relevant room
complies with the applicable national and local requirements;
 The instrument is used in accordance with the user’s manual.

Signs in this manual：

WARNING: Indicates a potential hazard or unsafe practice that, if not avoided,

will result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION: Indicates a potential hazard or unsafe practice that, if not avoided,

could result in minor injury or product/property damage.

NOTE: Provides application tips or other useful information to ensure that you get
the most from your product.

Warranty and maintenance service

The warranty period for the purchased products shall be subject to the sales contract.
The consumables means disposable consumables material needed to be replaced after
using every time or vulnerable material needed to be replaced regularly. The consumables
don’t have warranty service.
The warranty period starts from the "installation date" filled in on the attached
<Equipment Warranty Card>, which is the only proof to calculate the warranty period.

II
In order to protect your rights, please fill in the warranty card after the installation of the
equipment, and give the second warranty card ("Biolight company retention") to the
installer or mail it back to the after-service department of Biolight.
Please note that the following conditions will not be covered by the warranty:
 The customer does not fill in or return the equipment warranty card within 30
days after the installation acceptance;
 The equipment series number provided by the customer is not correct (our
company confirms the equipment series number is warranty or not).
Within the warranty period, all products can enjoy free after-sales service; however,
please note that, even within the warranty period, due to the following reasons, the
products need to be repaired, the company will carry out maintenance service, you need to
pay maintenance fees and accessories fees:
 Man-made damage;
 Improper use;
 The voltage of the power network exceeds the product’s specified range;
 Irresistible natural disasters;
 Replace or use parts, accessories, consumables that are not approved by
Biolight or maintained by non-authorized personnel of Biolight;
 Other faults not caused by the product itself.
After the expiration of the warranty, Biolight can continue to provide charged
maintenance services. If you do not pay or delay in paying the maintenance fee, Biolight
will suspend the maintenance service until you pay for it.

After service
Manufacturer: Guangdong Biolight Meditech Co., Ltd.
Address: No.2 Innovation First Road, Technical Innovation
Coast, Hi-tech Zone, Zhuhai, P.R. China
Fax: +86-756-3399919
Post code: 519085
Toll-free consultation hot line: +86-400-8818-233

III
About this manual
This manual contains the instructions necessary to operate the product safely and in
accordance with its function and intended use. Observance of this manual is a prerequisite
for proper product performance and correct operation and ensures patient and operator
safety.
This manual is based on the maximum configuration and therefore some contents may
not apply to your product. If you have any question, please contact us.
This manual is an integral part of the product. It should always be kept close to the
equipment so that it can be obtained conveniently when needed.
The manual is geared for clinical professionals who are expected to have a working
knowledge of medical procedures, practiced and terminology as required for monitoring
patients.
All illustrations in this manual serve as examples only. They may not necessarily reflect
the setup or data displayed on your product.

Conventions:
 Bold Italic text is used in this manual to quote the referenced chapter or sections.
 【】is used to enclose screen texts.
 → is used to indicate operational procedures.

IV
 Content

Chapter 1 General Introduction .................................................................................. 1-1

1.1. Intended Use ....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2. Main Unit ............................................................................................................ 1-1
1.3. Screen Display .................................................................................................... 1-5
Chapter 2 Safety............................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1. Safety Information .............................................................................................. 2-1
2.2. Equipment Symbols ............................................................................................ 2-3
2.3. Packaging Symbols ............................................................................................. 2-4
Chapter 3 Basic Operations ......................................................................................... 3-1
3.1. Installation........................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2. Getting Started .................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3. Shutting off the Monitor ...................................................................................... 3-4
3.4. Operation and Browse ......................................................................................... 3-5
3.5. General Settings .................................................................................................. 3-6
3.6. Measurement Settings ......................................................................................... 3-8
3.7. Operation Mode ................................................................................................ 3-10
3.8. Using the Timer................................................................................................. 3-14
3.9. Voice Assistant.................................................................................................. 3-15
Chapter 4 Patient Management ................................................................................... 4-1
4.1. Discharging a Patient .......................................................................................... 4-1
4.2. Admitting a Patient ............................................................................................. 4-2
4.3. Managing Patient Information............................................................................. 4-2
4.4. Connecting to a Central Monitoring System ....................................................... 4-4
Chapter 5 Managing Configurations........................................................................... 5-1
5.1. Introduction ......................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2. Selecting default configuration............................................................................ 5-1
5.3. Saving current settings ........................................................................................ 5-1
5.4. Deleting a configuration ...................................................................................... 5-2
5.5. Transferring a configuration ................................................................................ 5-2
5.6. Loading current configuration ............................................................................. 5-3
5.7. New Patient Usage Configuration ....................................................................... 5-3
5.8. Monitor Boot Usage Configuration ..................................................................... 5-4
5.9. Setting password valid time ................................................................................ 5-4
Chapter 6 User Interface .............................................................................................. 6-1
6.1. Interface Style ..................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2. Dynamic Trend Screen ........................................................................................ 6-2
6.3. OxyCRG screen .................................................................................................. 6-3
6.4. Other Bed Observation ........................................................................................ 6-4
6.5. Big Font Screen ................................................................................................... 6-8
V
 6.6. Freezing Waveforms ........................................................................................... 6-8
Chapter 7 Alarm ........................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1. Introduction ......................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2. Safety Information .............................................................................................. 7-1
7.3. About the alarm ................................................................................................... 7-2
7.4. Viewing physiological alarms list ....................................................................... 7-4
7.5. Viewing technical alarms list .............................................................................. 7-4
7.6. Setting Alarm ...................................................................................................... 7-4
7.7. Alarm Pause ........................................................................................................ 7-9
7.8. Alarm Reset....................................................................................................... 7-11
7.9. Latching Alarms ................................................................................................ 7-11
7.10. Nurse Call ....................................................................................................... 7-12
7.11. Intubation Status.............................................................................................. 7-14
7.12. Other Bed Alarm ............................................................................................. 7-15
7.13. Detecting Alarm .............................................................................................. 7-16
7.14. Actions When an Alarm Occurs ...................................................................... 7-16
Chapter 8 ECG.............................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1. Introduction ......................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2. Safety Information .............................................................................................. 8-1
8.3. ECG Display ....................................................................................................... 8-2
8.4. Preparing for ECG Monitoring............................................................................ 8-3
8.5. ECG Settings ....................................................................................................... 8-9
8.6. Arrhythmia Monitoring ..................................................................................... 8-15
8.7. ST Monitoring ................................................................................................... 8-17
8.8. QT/QTc Monitoring .......................................................................................... 8-24
8.9. Isoelectric Segments.......................................................................................... 8-29
8.10. ECG Relearning .............................................................................................. 8-29
8.11. Calibrating ECG .............................................................................................. 8-29
8.12. Defibrillation Synchronization ........................................................................ 8-30
8.13. ECG Troubleshooting ..................................................................................... 8-31
Chapter 9 Respiration Rate (RESP) ............................................................................ 9-1
9.1. Introduction ......................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2. Safety Information .............................................................................................. 9-1
9.3. RESP Display ...................................................................................................... 9-2
9.4. Placing RESP Electrodes .................................................................................... 9-2
9.5. RESP Settings ..................................................................................................... 9-4
9.6. RESP Troubleshooting ........................................................................................ 9-6
Chapter 10 SpO2 ......................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2. Safety Information .......................................................................................... 10-2
10.3. Monitoring Procedure ..................................................................................... 10-3
10.4. Setting SpO2 ................................................................................................... 10-3
10.5. Setting PR ....................................................................................................... 10-5
10.6. SpO2 Measurement Limitations ...................................................................... 10-6

VI
Chapter 11 Temperature（TEMP） ........................................................................ 11-1
11.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2. Displaying the TEMP Parameter Area ............................................................ 11-1
11.3. TEMP Display ................................................................................................. 11-1
11.4. Preparing for TEMP Monitoring ..................................................................... 11-2
11.5. TEMP Settings ................................................................................................ 11-2
11.6. TEMP Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 11-3
Chapter 12 NIBP ......................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................... 12-1
12.2. Safety Information .......................................................................................... 12-1
12.3. NIBP Measurement Limitations ...................................................................... 12-3
12.4. Measurement Modes ....................................................................................... 12-3
12.5. NIBP Display .................................................................................................. 12-4
12.6. Preparing for NIBP Measurements ................................................................. 12-5
12.7. Starting and Stopping NIBP Measurements .................................................... 12-7
12.8. NIBP Settings .................................................................................................. 12-8
12.9. Assisting Venous Puncture ............................................................................ 12-10
12.10. NIBP Maintenance ...................................................................................... 12-11
12.11. NIBP Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 12-11
Chapter 13 IBP............................................................................................................ 13-1
13.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2. Safety information ........................................................................................... 13-1
13.3. IBP measurement ............................................................................................ 13-2
13.4. IBP Display ..................................................................................................... 13-3
13.5. Setting IBP ...................................................................................................... 13-5
13.6. IBP troubleshooting......................................................................................... 13-9
Chapter 14 Cardiac output (C.O.) ............................................................................. 14-1
14.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................... 14-1
14.2. Safety Information .......................................................................................... 14-1
14.3. C.O. Measurement Limitation ......................................................................... 14-1
14.4. C.O. Display .................................................................................................... 14-2
14.5. C.O. Equipment Connecting ........................................................................... 14-3
14.6. C.O. Measurement........................................................................................... 14-3
14.7. C.O. Setting ..................................................................................................... 14-6
14.8. C.O. Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 14-7
Chapter 15 Carbon Dioxide (CO2) ............................................................................ 15-1
15.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................... 15-1
15.2. Safety information ........................................................................................... 15-1
15.3. CO2 Measurement Limitations ....................................................................... 15-2
15.4. Monitoring Procedure ..................................................................................... 15-2
15.5. Display ............................................................................................................ 15-7
15.6. Settings CO2 .................................................................................................... 15-8
15.7. Entering Intubation Status ............................................................................. 15-11
15.8. Zeroing .......................................................................................................... 15-11
VII
 15.9. Calibration ..................................................................................................... 15-12
15.10. Exhaust Emission ........................................................................................ 15-13
15.11. Announcements ........................................................................................... 15-13
15.12. CO2 Troubleshooting................................................................................... 15-15
Chapter 16 Drip Monitor (DM) ................................................................................. 16-1
16.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................... 16-1
16.2. Safety information ........................................................................................... 16-1
16.3. DM measurement ............................................................................................ 16-2
16.4. DM module indicator ...................................................................................... 16-5
16.5. DM display ...................................................................................................... 16-5
16.6. Setting DM ...................................................................................................... 16-6
16.7. DM check ........................................................................................................ 16-6
Chapter 17 Review ...................................................................................................... 17-1
17.1. Review Overview ............................................................................................ 17-1
17.2. Reviewing Page ............................................................................................... 17-1
Chapter 18 Calculations ............................................................................................. 18-1
18.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................... 18-1
18.2. Safety information ........................................................................................... 18-1
18.3. Drug Calculation ............................................................................................. 18-1
18.4. Hemodynamic Calculations ............................................................................ 18-4
18.5. Oxygenation Calculation ................................................................................. 18-6
18.6. Ventilation Calculations .................................................................................. 18-9
18.7. Nephridium Calculation ................................................................................ 18-11
Chapter 19 Recording................................................................................................. 19-1
19.1. Recorder .......................................................................................................... 19-1
19.2. Recording Type ............................................................................................... 19-1
19.3. Starting Recordings ......................................................................................... 19-2
19.4. Stopping Recordings ....................................................................................... 19-2
19.5. Recording Flags .............................................................................................. 19-2
19.6. Setting the Recorder ........................................................................................ 19-3
19.7. Installing Recording Paper .............................................................................. 19-4
19.8. Clearing Jam Paper.......................................................................................... 19-5
19.9. Cleaning Recorder ........................................................................................... 19-5
Chapter 20 Other Functions ...................................................................................... 20-1
20.1. Analog Signal Output ...................................................................................... 20-1
20.2. Network Settings ............................................................................................. 20-1
20.3. HL7 Settings ................................................................................................... 20-4
Chapter 21 Battery ..................................................................................................... 21-1
21.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................... 21-1
21.2. Installing a Battery .......................................................................................... 21-1
21.3. Battery Guidelines ........................................................................................... 21-1
21.4. Battery Maintenance ....................................................................................... 21-2
21.5. Battery Recycling ............................................................................................ 21-4
VIII
Chapter 22 Maintenance and Cleaning .................................................................... 22-1
22.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................... 22-1
22.2. Cleaning of the Monitor .................................................................................. 22-2
22.3. Disinfection ..................................................................................................... 22-2
22.4. Cleaning and Sterilizing of Accessories .......................................................... 22-3
22.5. Sterilization ..................................................................................................... 22-4
Chapter 23 Maintenance ............................................................................................ 23-1
23.1. Inspection ........................................................................................................ 23-1
23.2. Maintenance Schedule..................................................................................... 23-2
23.3. Disposing of the Monitor ................................................................................ 23-3
Chapter 24 Accessories ............................................................................................... 24-1
24.1. Recommended Accessories ............................................................................. 24-2
Appendix A Product Specifications .................................................................................... 1
A.1 Safety Specifications ............................................................................................... 1
A.2 Environmental Specifications .................................................................................. 2
A.3 Physical Specifications ............................................................................................ 2
A.4 Power Specifications ............................................................................................... 3
A.5 Hardware Specifications.......................................................................................... 4
A.6 Data Storage ............................................................................................................ 7
A.7 Wireless network ..................................................................................................... 7
A.8 Measurement Specifications .................................................................................... 8
A.9 Alarm Specification............................................................................................... 25
Appendix B EMC and Radio Regulatory Compliance ..................................................... 28
B.1 EMC ...................................................................................................................... 28
B.2 The management compliance of Radio.................................................................. 34
Appendix C Default Settings ............................................................................................ 35
C.1 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST, QT..................................................................................... 35
C.2 RESP ..................................................................................................................... 38
C.3 SpO2 ...................................................................................................................... 38
C.4 TEMP .................................................................................................................... 39
C.5 NIBP ...................................................................................................................... 40
C.6 IBP......................................................................................................................... 41
C.7 C.O. ....................................................................................................................... 43
C.8 CO2 ....................................................................................................................... 43
C.9 DM ........................................................................................................................ 44
C.10 Alarm Default Settings ........................................................................................ 44
C.11 Screen Setup ........................................................................................................ 45
C.12 Color of parameters ............................................................................................. 45
C.13 Recorder .............................................................................................................. 45
C.14 Other .................................................................................................................... 46
C.15 Maintenance Item ................................................................................................ 46
Appendix D Alarm Message ............................................................................................. 48

IX
 D.1 Physiological alarm ............................................................................................... 48
D.2 Technical Alarm .................................................................................................... 50
Appendix E Cybersecurity ............................................................................................... 60
E.1 Operating environment .......................................................................................... 60
E.2 Network data interface ........................................................................................... 60
E.3 User access control mechanism ............................................................................. 60
E.4 Software Environment ........................................................................................... 61
Appendix F Terminology and Definitions ........................................................................ 62
F.1 List of units ............................................................................................................ 62
F.2 Symbol list ............................................................................................................. 63
F.3 Terminology list ..................................................................................................... 64
Appendix G Toxic and Harmful Substances or elements ................................................. 68

X
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Chapter 1 General Introduction

1.1. Intended Use

The Veterinary monitor, hereafter called the monitor, are intended to be used for
monitoring, displaying, reviewing, storing and alarming of multiple physiological
parameters of animals, including ECG, Heart Rate(HR), Respiration Rate(RR),
Temperature(TEMP), Pulse Oxygen Saturation(SpO2), Pulse Rate(PR), Non-invasive
Blood Pressure(NIBP), Carbon dioxide(CO2), Invasive Blood Pressure(IBP) and Cardiac
output(C.O.).

WARNING：
 The monitor is intended for use only by clinical professionals or under their
guidance. It must only be used by persons who have received adequate training
in its use. Anyone unauthorized or untrained must not perform any operations
on it.

1.2. Main Unit

1.2.1. Front View

2 3

4
5

1-1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

1. Display screen
2. Light induction: For example, when the environment is dark, the display brightness
can be automatically adjusted.
3. Alarm lamp
Alarm lamp with different color and flashing frequency indicates the level of
technical alarm and physiological alarm:
 High level alarm: the lamp quickly flashes red.
 Medium level alarm: the lamp slowly flashes yellow.
 Low level alarm: the lamp lights cyan without flashing.
4. Power indicating lamp
It is a LED that lights green and orange, the status of the LED is specified as follows:
 Green: When the AC mains is connected.
 Orange: When the AC mains is not connected and monitor is powered by
battery.
 Off: When the AC mains is not connected.
5. Charging indicating lamp
 Light up: When the battery is being charged.
 Off: When the battery is fully charged or no battery in monitor.
6. Phonetic holes.

1-2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

1.2.2. Side View

10 3

4
9 8

1. Power button
Power on: after the monitor is connected to the AC power supply, press the button to
open the monitor.
Power off: in the startup state, short or long press the power switch button to turn off
the monitor
2. Recorder
3. DM connector
4. TEMP connector
5. SpO2 connector
6. ECG connector

1-3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

7. NIBP connector
8. CO2 connector
9. C.O. connector
10. IBP connector

1.2.3. Rear View

3
4

5 6 7
1. VGA connector（optional）

Connect secondary display with a standard VGA connector. Auxiliary display and
monitoring are performed by connecting a secondary display. The display content of the
secondary display is consistent with the monitor display.

2. Multifunction connector（optional）

Simultaneously output defibrillation synchronization signal, nurse call signal and

analog output signal.
3. USB connector

It includes 2 standard USB2.0 connectors, which can be connected to USB devices

such as U disk and barcode scanner.
4. Network connector

The standard RJ45 interface, enabling networking with the central monitoring system,

1-4
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

other bed communications and system upgrades via.

5. Equipotential grounding terminal

When other devices and monitors are unified used, the wires should be used to
connect the equipotential grounding terminal of other devices and monitors to eliminate
the potential difference between different devices and ensure safety
6. AC power socket
7. Cable retainer

1.3. Screen Display

The monitor adopts a display screen of high-resolution TFT LCD. Measurement

parameters, waveforms, patient information, alarm area and menu can be displayed on the
screen. Standard screen is shown as follows:

1 3 2 5
4

7
6

1. Patient info area

Shows the room number, bed number, patient name, patient category and so on.

1-5
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Select this area to enter the【Patient Management】menu and detailed description please
to refer Chapter 4 Patient Management.
2. Current configuration
3. Technical alarm area
Display technical alarm information and prompt information. Cyclic displaying when
there are multiple messages. Select this area to open the 【Alarm Informations】menu to
view the current technical alarm.
4. Physiological alarm area
Shows the physiological alarm messages, medium-level and low-level alarm
messages display on the left, while the high-level alarm messages display on the right.
Cyclic displaying when there are multiple messages. Select this area to open the 【Alarm
Informations】menu to view the current physiological alarm.
5. System status information area
Display alarm volume, network and storage devices connection status, battery and
system time. For the battery status icon please to refer chapter 21 Battery.
6. Waveform area
Show the waveforms of physiological parameter. Label displays on the top left
corner of each waveform area. Select the waveform area of a parameter and enter the
corresponding parameter setting menu.
7. Parameter area
It consists of various parameter areas, and shows parameter value, unit, alarm limit
and alarm status, etc. Label displays on the top left corner of each parameter area. Select
the parameter area of a parameter to enter the corresponding parameter setting menu.
8. Area of touch quick keys
Shows quick keys, these quick keys are used to conduct some common operations.

1-6
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

1.3.1. Interface Symbols

The following table shows the symbols and meanings displayed in the system
information area:

Symbol Note Symbol Note

Wireless network connected.

Wireless network not
The physical part represents the
connected.
network signal strength.

Wired network not

Wired network connected
connected.

The parameter alarm is

turned off or the alarm
All the alarms are paused.
system of the monitor is
turned off.

The alarm has been confirmed

Audible alarm tones are
and the alarm system has been
turned off
reset.

Indicates that the battery is fully Indicates that the battery is

charged. half charged.

Indicates that the battery is

almost depleted and need to
Indicates that the battery is
be charged immediately,
empty and needs to be charged.
otherwise the monitor will
automatically turn off.

Indicates that the battery is Indicates that the monitor is

being charged. being powered by AC power.

No battery is installed.

1.3.2. Quick keys

Quick keys are displayed at the bottom of the monitor's main screen. Through the
quick keys, you can easily and quickly access some functions or perform operations.

1-7
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

1.3.2.1. Quick keys list

The symbols on the quick keys are shown as follows:

Symbol Quick key Note Function

Previous page Previous page

Next page Next page

Main menu Enter the main menu

Standby Enter the Standby mode

Alarm Setup Enter the【Alarm Setup】menu

Review Enter the【Review】interface

NIBP measure Enter the【NIBP Measure】menu

NIBP Start/ Stop Start/Stop NIBP measurement

NIBP Stop All Stop all NIBP measurement

NIBP STAT NIBP STAT measurement mode

Venipuncture Start/Stop Assistant venipuncture

Zero Start IBP, CO2 Zero

Freeze Enter the【Freeze】menu

Alarm Reset Alarm reset

Alarm Pause Pause current alarm

Screen setup Enter the 【Screen Setup】 menu

1-8
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Symbol Quick key Note Function

Patient Management Enter the 【Patient Management】menu

Discharge patient Discharge the current patient

Sound Enter the【Sound】setting menu

Brightness Enter the 【Brightness】 menu

Lock screen / Unlock screen Disable/activate touch screen

Wireless Setup Enter the【Wireless Setup】menu

Intubation status Enter / exit Intubation status

Record setup Enter the【Record Setup】menu

Realtime Record Manually start/stop real-time recording

Calculations Enter the【Calculations】menu

Remote View Enter the 【Remote View】interface

Night mode / exit night mode Enter / Exit night mode

Voice Assistant / Turn off voice

Turn voice assistant on/off
assistant

Manual event Manually trigger and save events

1.3.2.2. Setting the quick keys

You can set quick keys which need to be displayed on the interface, as follows:
1. Enter the 【Quick keys】setting menu in one of the following ways:
 Select 【Screen Setup】 quick key → select 【Quick keys】 submenu.

1-9
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

 Select the 【Main Menu】quick key → select 【Quick keys】 from

【Display】 column.
2. Set the required quick keys:
 Add quick key: Select desired quick key from the 【Choices】 column
on the left, and then select 【Add】.
 Delete parameters: Select desired quick key from the【Selected】column
on the right, and then select 【Delete】.
 Move the display position of quick key: From the 【Selected】quick key
column on the right to select quick keys needed to be moved. And select
【Move To Up】, 【Move To Down】, 【Move To Top】 or 【Move
To Bottom】 as needed.
 Select 【Default Setting】 and the quick key settings will restore the
factory default settings.

1.3.3. Menu

The styles of the various menus are basically similar, see the picture below:

5
2

3 6

4
1. Menu title：Summary of the current menu.
2. Submenu button：Press this button to enter the corresponding submenu.
3. Main display area of menu: Display menu options.

1-10
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

4. Operation button: Click to start an operation.

5. Exit button: Exit the current menu.
6. Function switch:
 Green: The function switch is on;
 Gray: The function switch is off.

1-11
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Chapter 2 Safety
2.1. Safety Information

WARNING：
 The device is intended for animal monitoring by trained personnel in the
specified places.
 The physiological data and alarm messages displayed on the monitor are for
reference only and cannot be directly used for diagnostic interpretation.
 The monitor can only be used for a single patient at the same time
 This monitor can only be connected to a power outlet that has a protective
ground. Do not use a removable multi-hole socket. If the power outlet is not
connected to a grounding conductor, do not use the outlet and use a
rechargeable battery to power the monitor.
 Before use, you must check the equipment, cables and accessories to ensure
they work properly and safely.
 To avoid explosion hazard, do not use the monitor in the presence of
flammable anesthetics or other flammable substance in combination with air,
oxygen-enriched environments, or nitrous oxide.
 Do not open the shell of the device; otherwise the electric shock hazard may
exist. All maintenance and upgrades must be carried out by the personnel
trained and authorized by manufacturer only.
 Do not use the monitor in nuclear magnetic resonance (MR) environments.
 The operator cannot simultaneously touch the conductive parts on the patient
and the monitor.
 Do not come into contact with the patient during defibrillation. Otherwise
serious injury or death could result.
 Do not rely exclusively on the audible alarm system for patient monitoring.
Adjustment of alarm volume to a low level or off may result in a hazard to the
patient. Remember that alarm settings should be customized according to
different patient situations and always keeping the patient under close

2-1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

surveillance is the most reliable way for safe patient monitoring.

 Carefully place the power cord and various accessory cables to avoid risk of
entanglement or suffocated, the cables entangled, or subject to electrical
interference.
 To avoid danger or pollute the environment, the packaging materials must be
handled in accordance with local regulations or the hospital's waste disposal
system. Packaging materials must be placed out of reach of children.
 When monitoring the patient, the monitor should be continuously powered.
Unexpected power interruption of the monitor may result in loss of patient
data.
 The user should periodically check and move the sensor on the skin to avoid
adverse skin or tissue effects.

CAUTION：
 To ensure patient safety, use only parts and accessories specified in this
manual.
 Magnetic and electrical fields are capable of interfering with the proper
performance of the monitor. For this reason make sure that all external devices
operated in the vicinity of the monitor comply with the relevant EMC
requirements. Mobile phone, X-ray equipment or MRI devices are a possible
source of interference as they may emit higher levels of electromagnetic
radiation.
 To avoid contamination or infection of personnel, environment or other
equipments, the equipment and its accessories that meet the service life must be
disposed in accordance with relevant local regulations or hospital systems.
 The lifetime of the monitor is 5 years.
 Before turning on the device, make sure that the voltage and frequency of the
power supply meet the label of the device or the requirements specified in this
manual.
 Please install or carry the equipment properly to prevent it from falling,
colliding, being subjected to strong vibration or other mechanical external
damage.
2-2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

 The monitor must be wiped dry immediately after exposure to rain or splashes.
 Please do not mix different types and brands of electrodes. Mixing the
electrodes may result in a large baseline drift or a long baseline recovery time
after defibrillation. It is forbidden to use dissimilar metal electrodes, which
may cause high polarization voltages.

NOTE：

 Put the monitor in a location where you can easily see the screen and access the
operating controls.
 This device uses a power plug to disconnect it from an AC power. Place the
device in a location where it is easy to plug in and out.
 In normal use, the operator should stand in front of the device
 Keep this manual near the device so that it can be easily and timely obtained
when needed.
 This manual describes the product in the most complete configuration. This
manual describes all features and options. Your monitor may not have all of
them.

2.2. Equipment Symbols

Your device may not have all of the symbols below.

Symbol Note Symbol Note

Defibrillation-proof Type BF Abbreviation of
ECG
applied part “Electrocardiogram”.
Defibrillation-proof Type CF Abbreviation of Pulse “Oxygen
SpO2
applied part Saturation”.
Attention: Consult
Abbreviation of
accompanying documents (this TEMP
“Temperature”.
manual).
Abbreviation of “Carbon
Non-ionizing radiation CO2
dioxide”.
Abbreviation of “Non-invasive
Dangerous voltage NIBP
Blood Pressure”.

2-3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Symbol Note Symbol Note

Abbreviation of “Invasive
Equipotential grounding IBP
Blood Pressure”.

Abbreviation of “Drip
Auxiliary output DM
Monitor”.
Abbreviation of “Cardiac
Network C.O.
output”

VGA display connector Alternating current（AC）

Defibrillator synchronization
USB
output connector

Manufacture date Manufacturer

Degree of protection against

Serial number IP21
ingress of liquid

Refer to this user’s manual. LOT Batch code

Warning：the protection against the effects of the discharge of a cardiac

defibrillator is dependent upon the appropriated cable

Symbol for the marking of electrical and electronics devices according to Waste
Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive.

2.3. Packaging Symbols

Symbol Symbol Note

Fragile. Handle with care.

This Side Up.

Keep dry.

Stacking layer limit, where ‘n’ represents the maximum permissible

number of layers. (N = 6).

2-4
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Chapter 3 Basic Operations

3.1. Installation

WARNING：
 The equipment should be installed by personnel designated by the
manufacturer.
 The copyright of the software of this device belongs to the manufacturer. No
organization or individual can tamper with, copy or exchange any
infringement by any means or form without permission.
 Equipment connected to the analog or digital interfaces must comply with the
respective IEC standards (e.g. IEC 60950 for data processing equipment and
IEC 60601-1 for medical equipment). Furthermore all configurations shall
comply with the current version of the standard for SYSTEMS IEC 60601-1.
Everybody who connects additional equipment to the signal input part or
signal output part configures a medical system, and is therefore responsible
that the system complies with current version of the requirements of the system
standard IEC 60601-1. If in doubt, consult the technical service department or
your local representative.
 When the equipment is connected to other electrical equipment into a
combination with specific functions, if it is impossible to determine whether the
combination is dangerous (for example, the electric shock hazard caused by the
accumulation of leakage current), please contact the expert of the company or
the hospital to ensure that the necessary safety of all equipment will not be
damaged in the combination.

3.1.1. Unpacking and Checking

1. Unpacking
Before unpacking, examine the packing case carefully for signs of damage. If any
damage is detected, contact the carrier. If the packing case is intact, open the package.
2. Remove the monitor and accessories carefully.

3-1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

3. Keep all the packaging materials for future use in transportation or storage.
4. Check the monitor and accessories
Check the monitor and its accessories one by one in accordance with the packing list.
Check to see if the parts have any mechanical damages. In case of problems, please
contact us or our agent.

WARNING：
 Keep the packing materials out of children’s reach. Disposal of the packing
materials should comply with local regulations or the hospital's waste disposal
system.
 The monitor might be microbial contaminated during storage and transport.
Before use, please verify whether the packages, especially the package of
disposable accessories are intact. In case of any damage, do not apply it to the
patient.

3.1.2. Environmental equirements

The operating environment of the equipment must meet the specifications in this
manual.
The operating environment of the equipment should also reasonably free from the
noises, vibration, dust, corrosive or flammable, explosive substances. If it is installed in
the cabinet, make sure that there is enough space in front of the cabinet for operation,
maintenance and repair; In order to maintain ventilation, the equipment should be at least
2 inches (5cm) away from around the cabinet.
When the equipment is transferred from one place to another, condensation may
occur due to differences in temperature or humidity. At this point, you must wait for the
condensation to disappear before you can use the equipment.

WARNING：
 Please ensure the monitor is working under specified conditions; otherwise, the
technical specifications mentioned in this manual will not be met, thus possibly
leading to damage of equipment and other unexpected results.

3-2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

3.2. Getting Started

3.2.1. Connecting the Power

 Connecting the AC power

When the monitor need to be supplied by AC power, you can plug one end of the AC
power cord into the AC power connector on the back of the monitor and the other end
plug into the AC power outlet.

WARNING：
 Always use the accompanying power cord delivered with the monitor.
 Use the battery if the integrity of the protective earth conductor or the
protective earthing system in the installation is in doubt.

 Using battery
The monitor can be powered by a rechargeable lithium battery. After the battery is
installed, if the external power supply is suddenly interrupted, the monitor can
automatically use the lithium battery to supply the power. For the use of the battery,
please refer to Chapter 21 Battery.

3.2.2. Starting the Monitor

After installing the monitor, you can monitor the patient.

1. Before powering on the monitor, please check whether there has mechanical
damaged, external cables and accessories connect correctly.
2. Plug the power cord into an AC outlet. If using battery power, make sure there
is enough power in the battery.
3. When pressing the power switch, the alarm light will display red, yellow and
cyan in turn. After the alarm light is turned off, the screen will display the
startup interface. After the system emits a beep, the startup screen disappears
and enters the main monitoring interface.

3-3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

WARNING：
 If the monitor is damaged or does not work properly, do not use it for any
monitoring procedure on a patient. And then please contact the maintenance
personnel or the manufacturer immediately.

3.2.3. Starting Monitoring

1. Decide what parameters should be monitored or measured.

2. Connecting required cables and sensors.
3. Check whether the connection of cables and sensors is correct.
4. Check whether all kinds of settings are correct, for example: 【Patient Type】 and
【Paced】. For detailed information on the measurement or monitoring of each
parameter, please refer to the corresponding chapters.

3.3. Shutting off the Monitor

Please follow the below steps to shut off the monitor:

1. Confirm that the patient monitoring is finished.
2. Disconnect the cables and sensors form the monitor.
3. Confirm that the monitoring data is stored or cleared.
4. Press the power switch for several second, the monitor interface will pop up the
shutdown dialog box, click OK to shutting off the monitor.

CAUTION：
 Although not recommended, you can press and hold the power on/off switch
for 5 seconds to forcibly shut down the monitor when it could not be shut down
normally or under some special situations. This may cause loss of data of the
monitor.

3-4
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

NOTE：

 The AC power supply of the monitor is not cuff off through the power switch.
To completely disconnect the power supply, unplug the power cord.
 In case of a temporary power failure, the monitor retains patient data before
shutdown, including patient monitoring data and configuration data.

3.4. Operation and Browse

Everything you need to operate the monitor is on its screen. Almost every element on
the screen is interactive. Screen elements include parameter values, waveforms, quick
keys, information area, alarms area, menus, etc. Often you can access the same element in
different ways. For example, you can access a parameter setup menu by selecting
corresponding parameter area or waveform area.

3.4.1. Using the Touch screen

Click on the touch screen to complete some operations quickly and easily.
In order to prevent misoperation of the touch screen, you can operate the 【Lock
Screen】 quick key to temporarily lock the touch screen. After the touch screen is locked,
the 【Lock Screen】 quick key become 【Unlock Screen】, and its background color is
blue, which indicating that the touch screen operation is disabled.
The lock time of the touch screen can be customized, the steps are as follows:
1. Enter the【Other】interface in the following ways:
 Select 【Screen Setup】quick key → select 【Other】submenu;
2. Set the 【Screen Lock Duration】. The touch screen is unlocked under the
following conditions:
 When the set lock screen duration is reached, the touch screen is
automatically unlocked.
 Select the 【Unlock Screen】quick key to unlock the touch screen.

CAUTION：
 Check the touch screen whether it is damaged or breakage before use. If it is
found to be damaged or broken, please stop using the monitor immediately and

3-5
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

contact the service personnel.

 If you find that the touch screen is loose, stop using the monitor immediately
and contact your service personnel.

3.4.2. Using the Mouse

The monitor supports the mouse with USB connector, the mouse can be plugged and
unplugged. You can use the mouse to select a screen element by moving the cursor on the
element and then click on it.

3.4.3. Using the Barcode scanner

The monitor supports the barcode scanner to input patient’s medical record number
or registration number, and connects to the monitor through USB interface

3.4.4. Using the On-Screen Keyboard

The on-screen keyboard enables you to enter information:

 Use the key to delete the previous character.

 Use the key to toggle between uppercase and lowercase letters.

 Use the key to confirm what you have entered and close the onscreen keyboard.

 Use the key to clear the entered character

 Use the key to access the symbol keyboard.

 Use the key to return to alphabetic keyboard.

3.5. General Settings

This chapter only introduces the general settings. For the setting of parameters and
other functions, please refer to the corresponding chapter.

3.5.1. Language Settings

1. Select【Main Menu】→from【System】column to select【Maintenance】

3-6
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

→enter the maintenance password.

2. Select【Other】submenu.
3. Select【Language】and then select the desired language.
4. Restart the monitor.

3.5.2. Adjusting the Screen Brightness

The steps to set the screen brightness are as follows:

1. Set the brightness in one of the following ways:

 Select【Brightness】quick key.

 Select【Screen Setup】quick key→select【Other】submenu.

2. If the monitor operates on AC power，please set 【Brightness】；If the monitor

operates on battery power，please set【Brightness On Battery】.

3. When the 【Brightness】set as【Auto】,the screen will change to the

brightness automatically according to the environment light intensity.

NOTE：

 When the monitor enters standby mode, the screen brightness will be
automatically adjusted to the lowest.
 When the AC power is interrupted and the battery is powered, the screen
brightness is automatically set to the corresponding brightness when the
battery is powered. You can still manually adjust the brightness as needed.

3.5.3. Setting the Date and Time

1. Select【Main Menu】→from【System】column to select【Time】, enter the

【System Time】.
2. Select【Date】and【Time】to set the current date and time.
3. Select【Date Format】.
4. If you need to use 12 hours format, turn off 【24-Hour】.

3-7
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

If the monitor is connected to the central monitoring system, the system time of the
monitor will be automatically adjusted according to the time of the central monitoring
system.

CAUTION：
 When starting to use the monitor, please modify the date and time of the device
according to the local time. Incorrect date and time setting may lead to
misjudgment of patient trend data.

3.5.4. Adjusting Volume

Select【Sound】quick key, Set 【Alarm Volume】, 【High Alarm Volume】,

【Reminder Volume】, 【QRS Volume】, 【Touch Tone】 and 【NIBP End Tone】
switch respectively.

3.6. Measurement Settings

3.6.1. Setting Parameters

You can manually turn the parameter switch on or off. The steps to set the parameter
switch are as follows:

1. Enter【Parameter Switch】interface in one of the following ways:

 Select【Screen Setup】quick key→select 【Param Switch】submenu.
 Select【Main Menu】quick key, from【Parameter】column to select
【Parameter Switch】.

2. Turn on or off the corresponding parameters as needed

When a parameter is off, the monitor interface will not display the parameter
value and waveform.

3-8
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

3.6.2. Setting Display Screen

You can set the parameter waveform and its order displayed in the normal interface
as required. The steps are as follows:
1. Enter【Screen Layout】interface in one of the following ways:
 Select【Screen Setup】quick key→select【Screen Layout】submenu.
 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Display】column to select
【Screen Layout】.
2. Select a parameter area or waveform. From the pop-up parameter list to select
the elements needed to display in the area. The selected parameters and
waveforms are displayed according to the set position. The parameters and
waveforms that are not selected will not be displayed on the interface.

NOTE：The first line of the parameter area and the waveform area always

displays the ECG parameters and the first ECG waveform.

WARNING：
 The parameters of the 【Screen Layout】 are not assigned to the display area,
which will not be displayed on the monitor interface and relevant alarms for
this parameter will still be provided

3.6.3. Setting the Parameter

Each parameter has an independent setting menu, through which alarm and
parameter setting can be modified. You can enter the Parameter Setting Menu in the
following ways:
 Select the parameter area or waveform area of a parameter
 Select 【Main Menu】 quick key, from 【Parameter】 column to select
【Setup】，and then select corresponding parameter.

3-9
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

3.7. Operation Mode

3.7.1. Monitor Mode

Monitor mode is the most common clinical working mode used to monitor patient.
When the monitor is turned on, it automatically enters the monitor mode.

3.7.2. Standby Mode

You can temperately stops patient monitoring without switching off the monitor by
entering the standby mode. You can enter the Standby Mode in the following ways：

3.7.2.1. Entering the Standby Mode

Select either way showed in the following to enter the Standby Mode：
 Press【Standby】quick key, or
 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from the【Patient】column to select
【Standby】button, or
 Select【Patient Management】quick key→discharging patient and the
enter Standby Mode.

The monitor behaves as follows after entering the standby mode:

 Stops all parameter measurements.
 Disables all the alarms and prompt messages, except for the battery
low alarm.
 Turns screen brightness to the dimmest after entering the standby
mode for 30 seconds.

WARNING：
 Pay attention to the potential risk of placing the monitor to standby. In the
standby mode, the monitor stops all parameters’ measurements and disables
all the alarm indications, except for the battery low alarm.

3-10
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

3.7.2.2. Exit the Standby Mode

To exit the standby mode, choose any of the following ways:

 Select【Resume Monitor】to exit the standby mode and resume monitoring the
current patient.
 Select【Discharge Patient】to discharge the current patient.

If the monitor automatically enters the standby mode after a patient is discharged,
choose any of the following ways to exit the standby mode:
 Select【Patient Management】 to exit the standby mode and admit a new
patient.
 Select【Monitor】to enter the patient information for preparing to admit a new
patient.

3.7.3. Demo Mode

In Demo mode, the monitor can demonstrate its major functions when patient or
patient simulator is not connected. The Demo mode is password protected
Choose the following way to enter the Demo Mode:
1. Select【Main Menu】→from【System】column to select【Demo】.
2. Input the password→select【OK】.
Shut down and restart to exit the Demo Mode.

WARNING：
 The demonstration function is mainly used to display machine performance
and to train users. In the actual clinical use, it is forbidden to use the
demonstration function, so as to prevent the medical staff from mistakenly
thinking that the monitor displays the waveform and parameters of the
monitored patient, thus affecting the patient’s monitoring and delaying the
diagnosis and treatment.

3-11
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

3.7.4. Night Mode

Night mode is a special clinical monitoring mode. Under the night mode, the alarm
volume, QRS volume and screen brightness turn to be lowest automatically. To avoid
disturbing the patient, night mode may be used.

3.7.4.1. Entering Night Mode

The steps of entering【Night Mode】as following:

1. Select【Night Mode】quick key or select【Main Menu】quick key→from
【Display】column to select【Night Mode】button.
2. In the pop-up menu, set the night mode.
3. Select【Enter Night Mode】.
The night mode settings are as follows by default:
• Brightness: 1
• Alarm Volume: 2
• QRS Volume: 1
• Touch Tone: Off
• NIBP End Tone: Off

WARNING：
 Verify the settings of brightness, alarm volume, QRS volume and key tone
before entering the night mode. Pay attention to the potential risk if the setting
value is low.

3.7.4.2. Exit the Night Mode

To exit the night mode, follow this step:

1. Press【Exit Night Mode】quick key or select【Main Menu】quick key→from
【Display】column to select【Exit Night Mode】button.
2. In the pop-up box to select【OK】
..

NOTE：The monitor resumes the previous settings after exiting the night mode.

3-12
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

3.7.5. Privacy Mode

The privacy mode is a special monitoring mode. In the privacy mode, the monitor
does not display patient information and monitoring data to protect patient information
from non-clinicians such as visitors.
The privacy mode is only available when the patient admitted by the monitor is also
monitored by the Central monitoring system. The monitor continues monitoring the
patient, but patient data is only visible at the Central monitoring system.

3.7.5.1. Entering the Privacy Mode

To enter the privacy mode, choose either of the following ways:

 Select 【Main Menu】 quick key→from the【Display】column to select

【Privacy Mode】button→Select【OK】
.

The monitor has the following features after entering the privacy mode:
 The screen turns blank, and prompt 【Being monitoring】at same time.
 All parameters and waveforms display are shield.
 Except for the low battery alarm, the monitor inactivates alarm tone and alarm
light of all other alarms.
 The monitor suppresses all system prompt tone, including heart beat tone,
pulse tone, etc.

WARNING：
 In Privacy mode, all audible alarms are suppressed and the alarm light is
deactivated at the monitor. Alarms are presented only at the Central
monitoring system. Pay attention to potential risk.

CAUTION：
 Cannot enter the privacy mode if a low battery alarm occurs.

3-13
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

3.7.5.2. Exit the Privacy Mode

The monitor automatically exits the privacy mode in any of the following situations:
 The monitor disconnects from the Central Monitoring System.
 The low battery alarm occurs.
You can also press 【Exit Privacy Mode】on the screen to manually exit the privacy
mode.

3.8. Using the Timer

The monitor provides timer function, which can display up to four timers at the same
time. You can set each timer separately, which prompts when the set time arrives.

3.8.1. Displaying Timer

To display a timer, follow this procedure:

1. Access【Screen Layout】in either of the following ways:
 Select【Screen Setup】quick key→Select【Screen Layout】submenu.
 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from the【Display】column to select
【Screen Layout】.
2. Click the parameter area where you want to display the timer, select 【Timer】
→ select【Timer1】,【Timer2】,【Timer3】,【Timer4】.

3.8.2. Controlling the Timer

The timer provides the following controls:

: Start the timer.
【Start】
: Pause the timer.
【Pause】
: Resume the timer.
【Resume】
: Clear the current timing results and reset the timer.
【Reset】

WARNING：
 Do not use the timers to schedule critical patient-related tasks.

3-14
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

3.8.3. Setting the Timer

You can set each timer independently. To set the timer, follow this procedure:

1. Select the timer area to enter the【Timer】menu.

2. Set【Timer Type】:

 : The timer is timed according to the present 【Run Time】.

【Normal】
Stop timing when running time is reached.

 : The timer cycles, that is, the timer counts according to the
【Cycled】
preset 【Run Time】, and starts timing again after reaching the run time. The
timer area displays the number of timer cycles.

 : The timer displays the time elapsed since the timer was
【Unlimited】
started.

3. Set【Direction】
.

4. Set【Run Time】
.

5. Set【Reminder Volume】
. When the remaining time is 10 seconds, the monitor

issues a reminder tone and the timer flashes in red, prompting you that the run
time is to expire.

CAUTION：
 Cannot change timer settings when a timer is running.
 Set【Direction】, 【Run Time】and【Reminder Volume】only for【Normal】
or【Cycled】.

3.9. Voice Assistant

The voice assistant can be used as an auxiliary input interface. You can issue specific
control commands to the monitor via voice. After the monitor recognizes the command, it
performs the corresponding operation function.
The method of operating the voice assistant as following:
1. Select【Voice Assistant】quick key, open the voice assistant function, the icon

" " will display on the top of status bar.

3-15
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

2. Say the wake-up words. At this time, the top status bar will display the "
" icon, indicating that the monitor is in the state of voice recognition control
command.
3. When the control command is spoken, the monitor will recognize the
command and perform the corresponding operation, at this time, " " icon

disappears and the " " icon is displayed.

CAUTION：
 Every time before you say a control command, you must say the wake-up word
to wake up the voice assistant at first. After waking up（the top status bar

displays the " " icon）, if the control command is not spoken within 7

seconds, the voice assistant will enter the sleep state again (top The status bar
displays the " " icon）, you need to re-execute the “Wake-up” →

“Control Command” voice operation.

 When using the voice assistant, try to be as close as possible to the monitor.
 Please avoid using the voice assistant in noisy environments.

NOTE：
 The specific wake-up words and supported voice commands will show in the
voice assistant screen.

3-16
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Chapter 4 Patient Management

4.1. Discharging a Patient

Before monitoring a new patient, discharge the previous patient. After the patient is
discharged, all patient data, including patient information, trend data, and physiological alarm
information is be deleted from the monitor, the technical alarms are reset, and monitor
settings returns to their defaults (current configuration or user-specified configuration). For
more information, see 5.2 Setting Default Configuration.
After discharging a patient, the monitor automatically admit a new patient.

WARNING：
 Always discharge the previous patient before starting monitoring a new patient.
Failure to do so can lead to data being attributed to the wrong patient.

NOTE：

 Discharging a patient deletes all history data of current patient in the monitor.

Discharge a patient manually using either of the following methods:

 Select【Discharge Patient】quick key.

 Select the patient information area at the top left of the screen→Select
【Discharge Patient】
.

 Select【Patient Management】quick key→Select【Discharge Patient】

.

 Select【Main Menu】
, from 【Patient】column to select【Discharge Patient】
.

In the pop-up dialog box to select:

 【OK】：All patient data, including patient information, trend data, and

physiological alarm information, are cleared. The technical alarm status is reset
and the system reverts to its default configuration and enters into the standby
screen.

4-1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

 【Cancel】：Exit the operation of discharging patient data and return to the

main interface.

4.2. Admitting a Patient

The monitor admits a new patient in the following situations:

 After discharging a patient, the monitor automatically admit a new patient.

 From the standby screen, select【Discharge Patient】to admit a new patient.

Always inputs patient information as soon as the patient is admitted. For more
information please refer to 4.3.2 Editing Patient Information for details.

WARNING：
 【Patient Type】 and 【Paced】 will always contain a value, regardless of
whether the patient is fully admitted or not. If you do not specify settings for
these fields, the monitor uses the default settings from the current
configuration, which might not be correct for your patient.
 For paced patients, you must set 【Paced】 to 【Yes】. If it is incorrectly set to
【No】, the monitor could mistake a pace pulse for a QRS and fail to alarm
when the ECG signal is too weak.
 For non-paced patients, you must set 【Paced】 to 【No】.

4.3. Managing Patient Information

4.3.1. Patient Management menu

Use any of the following methods to enter the【Patient Management】menu:

 Select patient information area at the top left corner of the screen.
 Select【Patient Management】quick key.
 Select 【 Main Menu 】 →from 【 Patient 】 column to select 【 Patient
Management】.

4-2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

4.3.2. Editing Patient Information

Edit patient information after a patient has been admitted, or when patient
information is incomplete, or when you want to change patient information.
To edit patient information, follow this procedure:
1. Enter the 【Patient Management】 menu. For more information, please refer
to 4.3.1 Patient Management menu.
2. Select patient type according to the actual situation: 【Big Animal】, 【Small
Animal】.
3. Edit patient information as required.
If your monitor is connected with the barcode scanner, you can enter the medical
record number by scanning the barcode.

NOTE：

 The setting of patient type determines the algorithm used by the monitor to
process and calculate certain measurements, as well as the safety limit and
alarm limit range applicable to certain measurements.
 The monitor reloads the configuration when the patient type is changed.

4.3.3. Setting the Display Item

You can set whether to display and edit patient room number, name, age, and so on
in the 【Patient Management】 menu by following these steps:
1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input password→Enter.
2. Select【Patient Management】submenu→【Field】submenu.
3. Select which the patient information needs to be displayed and edited in the
【Patient Management】 menu.
4. Select customizes the patient information section, if necessary, and enters the
name of the section.

4-3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

4.4. Connecting to a Central Monitoring System

If your monitor is connected to a central monitoring system (CMS) manufactured by

Biolight:
 The monitor sends patient information, real-time monitoring or measurement
data, alarm limits, alarm levels, alarm messages, prompts, and various settings
to the central monitoring system.
 The central monitoring system and the monitor display synchronously, and
some functions can be controlled bidirectionally. For example, change patient
information, receive patient data, cancel patient data, etc.
 Alarm delay to the central monitoring system: the alarm delay time from this
equipment to the central monitoring system is ≤2s.
For details, refer to the CMS’s instructions for use.

4-4
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Chapter 5 Managing Configurations

5.1. Introduction

When performing continuous monitoring on a patient, the clinical professional often

needs to adjust the monitor’s settings according to the patient’s condition. The collection
of all these settings is called a configuration. The configuration of the monitor includes:
parameter configuration, alarm configuration and monitor configuration. You can change
some settings from a certain set of configuration and then save the changed configuration
as a user configuration.

WARNING：
 The configuration management function is password protected. The
configuration management tasks must be performed by clinical professionals.

5.2. Selecting default configuration

The default configuration can be the factory default configuration or a user

configuration that has been stored.
You can use the following steps to select the default configuration:
1. Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Configuration】column to select
【Set Default Config】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select【Factory Default】or User-defined configuration.
When selecting user-defined configuration, only one user configuration that has been
stored under the current patient type can be selected.

5.3. Saving current settings

Current settings can be saved as user configuration. Up to 10 user configurations can

be saved. The steps to protect the current settings are as follows:
1. Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Configuration】column to select
【Save User Config】→enter maintenance password→Enter.
2. In the popup dialog box of 【Save User Config】, input the configuration
name.

5-1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

3. Select【OK】
.

5.4. Deleting a configuration

You can delete the saved user configurations by following these steps:
1. Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Configuration】column to select
【Delete User Config】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select the configuration you want to remove:
In the【Delete User Config】menu, the currently existing user configuration on
the monitor is displayed.
3. Select【Delete】button.
4. In the popup dialog box to select【OK】
.

CAUTION：
 The current configuration in use cannot be deleted.

5.5. Transferring a configuration

The monitor provides configuration transfer function. You can use a USB drive to
transfer the configuration from one monitor to another monitor that needs the same
settings without having to reset them item by item. The monitor supports transferring the
monitor configuration with USB disk.

5.5.1. Exporting a configuration

You can export the monitor's current user configuration to a USB drive by following
these steps:
1. Connect the USB drive to the monitor’s USB port.
2. Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Configuration】column to select
【Export User Config】→input maintenance password→Enter.
3. Select configuration that needs to be exported.
4. Select【OK】.

5-2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

5.5.2. Importing a configuration

You can import the user configuration to the monitor through a USB drive by
following these steps
1. Connect the USB drive to the monitor’s USB port.
2. Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Configuration】column to select
【Import User Config】→input maintenance password→Enter.
3. Select configuration that needs to be imported.
4. Select【OK】.

5.6. Loading current configuration

You may make changes to some settings during operation. However, these changes
or the pre-selected configuration may not be appropriate for the newly admitted patient.
Therefore, the monitor allows you to load a desired configuration so as to ensure that all
the settings are appropriate for your patient.

To load a configuration by following these steps:

1. Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Configuration】column to select
【Load Current Config】.
2. Select configuration that needs to be loaded.
3. Select【OK】.

5.7. New Patient Usage Configuration

When receiving patients, you can select loading the nearest configuration or the
specified configuration. You can set the default configuration by following these steps:
1. Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Configuration】column to select
【New Patient Config】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select【Default】or【Current】
.
 【Default】: The monitor loads the default configuration specified by
the user when it receives the patient, please refer to 5.2 Selecting
Default Configuration.
 【Current】: The monitor loads the nearest configuration when it
receives the patient.

5-3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

5.8. Monitor Boot Usage Configuration

When the monitor starts, you can select whether the monitor loads the nearest
configuration or the specified configuration. You can set the default configuration by
following these steps:
1. Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Configuration】column to select
【Boot Config】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select【Default】or【Current】.
 【Default】: The monitor loads the default configuration specified by
the user the user when it starts. Please refer to 5.2 Selecting Default
Configuration.
 【Current】: The monitor loads the nearest configuration when it starts.

5.9. Setting password valid time

If you access the configuration management menu and use the password to access
alarm-related settings, you can set a valid time for the password, beyond which you will
need to re-enter the password.
Please follow the steps below:
1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select【Authorization】submenu.
3. Set【Retention Time】.

5-4
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Chapter 6 User Interface

6.1. Interface Style

You can set the style of the interface as needed.

6.1.1. Changing the Screen Layout

You can select the parameters and waveforms you want to view in the 【Screen
Layout】 window. For details, please refer to 3.6.2 Setting Display Screen.

6.1.2. Selecting Screen

The conventional screen is the most commonly used clinical monitoring screen for
the monitor, and the monitor enters the normal screen after being turned on. You can also
select the screen type as needed, the steps are as follows:
1. Enter【Select Screen】interface in one of the following ways:
 Select【Screen Setup】quick key→Select【Screen Select】submenu.
 Select 【Main Menu】quick key→from【Display】column to select
【Screen Select】
.
2. Select screen types as needed.

6.1.3. Setting Big Font Screen

1. Enter【Screen Layout】interface in one of the following ways:

 Select【Screen Setup】quick key→Select【Screen Layout】submenu.
 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Display】column to select
【Screen Layout】
.
2. Select【Big Font】submenu.
3. Click on each locale to display the parameters you want to display.

6.1.4. Changing Parameter Color

The steps for setting colors of parameter values and waveforms are as follows:

6-1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

1. Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Parameter】column to select【Param

Color】.
2. Select【Current Select】submenu to set the colors of parameter values and
waveforms.
3. Select 【All】submenu to set the colors of all parameter values and waveforms.

6.2. Dynamic Trend Screen

6.2.1. Entering Dynamic Trend Screen

The Dynamic Trend window is located to the left of the waveform area, showing the
trend of a series of parameters in a recent period of time. You can enter the Dynamic Trend
screen in any of the following ways:
 Select【Screen Setup】quick key→Select【Screen Select】submenu→Select
【Dynamic Trend】.
 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from 【Display】column to select【Screen
Select】→Select【Dynamic Trend】.
In the Dynamic Trend window, the parameter label name of the trend is displayed
above each trend curve, and the trend scale is displayed on the left. Trend times are
displayed at the bottom of the window.

6.2.2. Setting the Trend Time

Follow these steps to set the trend time:

1. Enter the Dynamic Trend window.
2. Select the Dynamic Trend area, open【Dynamic Trend】menu.
3. Select【Trend Length】
.

6.2.3. Exiting Dynamic Trend Screen

You can exit the Dynamic Trend screen by any of the following methods:
 Select【Screen Setup】quick key→Select【Screen Select】submenu→Select
the screen you need to enter.
 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Display】column to select【Screen
Select】→Select the screen you need to enter.

6-2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

6.3. OxyCRG screen

The OxyCRG screen graphically displays high-resolution trend curves and

compressed waveforms of HR, SpO2, and RR.

6.3.1. Entering OxyCRG screen

You can enter the OxyCRG screen by any of the following methods:

 Select【Screen Setup】quick key→Select【Screen Select】submenu→Select

【OxyCRG View】.

 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Display】column to select【Screen

Select】→Select【OxyCRG View】.

The OxyCRG screen shows two trend curves and a compression waveform.

6.3.2. Select Display Parameters and Scales

Follow the steps below to set the parameters of the OxyCRG screen:
1. Enter OxyCRG screen.
2. Select【Setup】.
3. Set【Trend 1】, 【Trend 2】, 【Compressed Wave】separately.
4. Select 【Scale】 submenu, set the scales of each parameter. If you want to use
the default scaleplate of the system, select the 【Default Scale】on the
OxyCRG screen.

6.3.3. Setting the Trend Time

Follow the steps below to set the Trend Time:

1. Enter OxyCRG screen.
2. Select【Zoom】
.

6.3.4. Entering OxyCRG Review Screen

You can review the 48-hour trend curve and compression waveform on the OxyCRG
Review Screen. Follow these steps to go to the OxyCRG Review Screen:
1. Enter OxyCRG screen.

6-3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

2. Select【Review】.

6.4. Other Bed Observation

You can check the alarm status and real-time physiological data of patients on other
remote monitors in the LAN on the monitor. A remote monitor (such as a bedside monitor)
is also called other bed monitor. You can monitor the alarms of up to 16 other beds at the
same time, and you can also view the waveform of 1 other bed from the current monitor.
You can monitor the alarm of other bed through the alarm monitoring area of【Other
Bed View】 interface.

CAUTION：
 Can view the monitor through the remote monitor. You can check the alarm
and waveform of this monitor from 5 remote monitors at the same time.

6.4.1. Other Bed Screen

Through the 【Other Bed View】screen, you can check the real-time parameters and
waveforms of a remote monitor and monitor the alarm of other monitors.

6.4.1.1. Entering Other Bed Screen

Entering other bed screen by any of the following methods:

 Select【Remote View】quick key.
 Select【Screen Setup】quick key→Select【Screen Select】submenu→Select
【Other Bed View】.

6.4.1.2. Other Bed Interface

Below is other bed observation interface:

6-4
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

1. Other bed observation area: Display the patient information, alarm status,
information, waveform and parameters of the selected bed. You can move the
interface down to browse the contents of the interface.
2. Other bed monitoring area
 Displays all remote monitors being monitored.
 Display the equipment number of other bed monitor, and indicate other bed
monitor's alarm status with different background colors:
• Red: Indicates that other bed monitor is giving high priority
physiological or technical alarm, and the high priority alarm is the
highest level alarm in the current alarm of the bed.
• Yellow: Indicates that other bed monitor is giving medium priority
physiological or technical alarm. The medium priority alarm is the
highest level alarm in the current alarm of the bed.
• Cyan: Indicates that the monitor is giving low priority physiological or
technical alarm, and the low priority alarm is the highest level alarm in
the current alarm of the bed.
• Green: Indicates that the monitor is connected successfully and no
alarms have occurred.
• Gray: Indicates that the monitor is not connected successfully.

• Gray with‘ ’: Indicates that the monitor is disconnected during the

connection process.

6-5
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

6.4.1.3. Adding Other Bed

Only add other bed monitor, the device can monitor alarm of other bed. If you have
added other bed monitor, you can up to a choice of 16 beds. Add other bed as follows:
1. Select other bed observation interface area, in the pop-up window 【Bed View
Settings (Bed number)】to select 【Bed】submenu.
2. Select the device number of the monitor to be observed in the list.
 The setup interface mainly displays the device number, IP, and
patient information of the networked monitor.
 Select【Show Offline Bed】to display the device numbers of all
monitors.

6.4.1.4. Delete Bed

If you no longer need to monitor the remote monitor, you can remove it as follows:
1. Select other bed observation interface area, in the pop-up window【Bed View
Settings (Bed number)】 to select【Bed】submenu.
2. Cancel the device number of the monitor in the list. If you want to delete all
beds, you can select【Delete All】.

6.4.1.5. Display Main Bed

In the other bed monitoring area of its bed observation window, select a bed and
then other bed observation window will display the real-time monitoring interface of the
monitor. This selected bed is called the main bed.

6.4.1.6. Alarm information Display

You can follow these steps to view the current real-time alarm information of the
main bed:
1. Enter【Alarm】interface by one of the following methods:
 Click on the alarm information display area of the bed observation area, and
the alarm interface will pop up.
 Select other bed observation interface area, in the pop-up window【Bed View

6-6
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Settings (Bed number)】 to select【Alarm】submenu.

2. In【Alarm】submenu to check the current physiological and technical alarm
information of the main bed.

6.4.1.7. Reset Other Bed Alarm

In the 【Bed View Settings (Bed number)】window→select【Reset Remote

Alarm】which in the 【Alarm】submenu, the alarm of the corresponding remote monitor
(main bed) is reset. Only when this function is turned on can you reset other bed alarm.
For detailed, please refer to 7.12.1 Other Bed Alarm Reset.

6.4.1.8. Selecting Waveform

Other bed observation area can display up to 4 waveforms. Following these steps to
select the label name of the waveform you want to observe:
1. Select other bed observation interface area, in the pop-up window【Bed View
Settings (Bed number)】to select【Wave】submenu.
2. In proper order to select 【First Wave】, 【Second Wave】, 【Third Wave】
and 【Fourth Wave】, then select the label name of the waveform in the
pop-up list. If you select is 【Close】, then the display of one waveform will
be turned off.

6.4.1.9. Selecting Parameters

Other bed observation can display all the online parameters. Select the parameter
label names you want to observe as follows:
1. Select other bed observation interface area, in the pop-up window【Bed View
Settings (Bed number)】 to select【Param】submenu.
2. Open the parameter labels you want to observe in the displayed list of online
parameters.

WARNING：
 The data displayed will delay in other bed observation window. Don't rely on
other bed observation window for real-time data.

6-7
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

6.5. Big Font Screen

You can enter big numerics screen in either of the following ways:
 Select【Screen Setup】quick key→Select【Screen Select】submenu→Select
【Big Font Screen】.
 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Display】column to select【Screen
Select】→Select【Big Font Screen】.
In the setting window of 【Big Font Screen】, you can select 6 parameters to observe
according to your needs. For parameters with waveform, one waveform is displayed at the
same time.

6.6. Freezing Waveforms

During monitoring the patient, you can freeze the waveform on the screen and then
review it to carefully observe the patient during this time. You can also export the frozen
waveform through the recorder.

6.6.1. Entering Freezing Status

1. Under the non-freezing condition, select【Freeze】quick key, and then

pop-up【Freeze】menu.

2. All waveforms are frozen, that is, the waveforms are not refreshed. The data
in the parameter area is refreshed normally.

6.6.2. Waveform Review

On the freezing waveforms screen you can operate the following:

 In the frozen status, you can select the control icon to browse the frozen
waveforms: the frozen waveform will move to the left or right correspondingly. At the
same time, each waveform is marked with a time scale, and the freezing time is recorded
as【0s】. As the waveform moves to the right, the time scale will be gradually changed to
6-8
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

【-1s】, 【-2s】, 【-3s】……

Icon Function
|<< Up to the fist page
<< Up to the previous page
< Up to the previous second
> Down to the next second
>> Down to the next page
>>| Down to the last page

 You can set the speed of the frozen waveform as needed.

6.6.3. Releasing Freezing

Under freezing condition, you can select button in the upper right corner of the
freezing menu to release the freezing condition.

6.6.4. Recording Freezing Waveforms

Select the 【Record】 button in 【Freeze】, the recorder will output the waveform
selected and the parameter value at the Freezing time. The recorder can output up to 3
waveforms at one time. For the setting of frozen waveforms, please refer t to 19.6.1
Selecting the record waveforms.

6-9
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Chapter 7 Alarm
7.1. Introduction

This chapter introduces the alarm function and the settings of the monitor.

7.2. Safety Information

WARNING：
 A potential hazard can exist if different alarm presets are used for the same or
similar equipment in any single area, e.g. an intensive care unit or cardiac
operating room.
 Alarm Settings for different monitors in the same area may vary to suit the
condition of the patient being monitored. Before starting the patient
monitoring, check whether the alarm setting is suitable for the patient, and
always open certain necessary alarm limits, and ensure that the alarm limit
setting is suitable for the patient.
 If your monitor is connected to the central monitoring system (CMS) or other
monitors, alarms can be displayed and controlled remotely. Remote suspension,
inhibition, or silence of monitor alarms via the CMS or other monitors may
cause a potential hazard. For details, refer to the operator’s manual of the
CMS and the other monitors.
 Setting the alarm limit to the highest may invalidate the alarm system.
 When the alarm sound is turned off, even if a new alarm is triggered, the
monitor will not emit an alarm sound. Therefore, the user must carefully select
whether to turn off the alarm sound. Check patient status frequently after
turning off alarm or alarm sound.
 For patients who cannot be continuously treated by medical staff, the alarm
settings must be made according to the patient's condition.
 Do not rely solely on an audible alarm system to monitor a patient. There may
be risks in adjusting the alarm sound to a lower volume, which may impede
operator recognition of alarm. The alarm volume should be large enough in the

7-1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

current monitoring environment and the actual clinical condition of the patient
should be paid close attention.

NOTE:

 When the alarm system is powered off, the monitor will save the alarm
information before power interruption, and the stored alarm information will
not change.

7.3. About the alarm

7.3.1. Alarm Categories

The monitor has two different types of alarms: physiological alarms and technical
alarm.
 Physiological alarms: Physiological alarms are triggered by a monitored
parameter value that violates set alarm limits or an abnormal patient
condition.
 Technical alarms: Technical alarms are triggered by a device malfunction due
to improper operation or system problems. The problems may result in
system abnormal operation or irresponsible monitoring parameters.
Apart from the physiological and technical alarm messages, the monitor will also
display some information related to system status or patient status.

7.3.2. Alarm Priority

By severity, the monitor’s alarms can be classified into three categories:

 High priority: Indicate that the patient is in a life threatening situation or a
severe device malfunction, and an emergency treatment is necessary.
 Medium priority: Indicate that your patient’s vital signs appear abnormal, a
severe device malfunction or an improper operation, and an immediate
treatment is required.
 Low priority: Indicate that the patient’s vital signs appear abnormal, a severe
device malfunction or an improper operation, the user needs to know the

7-2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

current situation.
 Prompt: Prompt patient and system status information.

7.3.3. Alarm Indicators

When an alarm occurs, the monitor will indicate it to the user through visual or
audible alarm indications:
High priority Medium priority Low priority
Alarm signal Prompt Note
alarm alarm alarm

The lamp The lamp slowly

The lamp turns
quickly flashes flashes yellow
cyan without
Alarm Lamp red with 1.4Hz with 0.4Hz～ / /
flashing, Duty
~2.8Hz, Duty 0.8Hz， Duty
cycle 100％.
cycle 20%-60%. cycle 20-60％.

DO-DO-DO--D
Alarm Tone O-DO -----
ISO DO-DO-DO - DO- / /
Mode DO-DO-DO--
DO-DO -----
Displayed in the
top information
Black words, Black words, area, click on
White words, White
Alarm Information Yellow Cyan the alarm
Red background words
background background information to
view the alarm
information list.
Displayed in
Alarm level symbol *** ** * / front of alarm
information.
Red Yellow Cyan
Parameter alarm background, background, background, / /
flashes flashes flashes

WARNING：
 When multiple alarms of different priorities occur simultaneously, the alarm
lamp and alarm tone are prompted according to the highest level of all current

7-3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

alarms.
 When there are multiple alarms in the same area at the same time, the alarm
messages are displayed circularly on the screen.

7.3.4. Alarm Status Symbols

In addition to the alarm methods described in section Alarm Indicators, the

following alarm icons will appear on the screen to indicate different alarm states:

Indicates an alarm for a parameter is off or the alarm system is off.

Indicates all the alarms are paused.

Indicates the alarm sound is off.

Indicates alarms are reset.

7.4. Viewing physiological alarms list

The steps of viewing physiological alarms are as follows:

1. Select physiological alarms area to enter【Alarm Informations】window.
2. Select【Phy. Alarm】submenu.

7.5. Viewing technical alarms list

The steps of viewing technical alarms list are as follows:

1. Select technical alarms area to enter【Alarm Informations】window.
2. Select【Tec. Alarm】submenu.

7.6. Setting Alarm

You can set the alarm properties centrally. Select【Alarm Setup】quick key or select
the corresponding button from the【Alarm】column, in the main menu to set alarm.

7.6.1. Setting Parameter Alarm

The steps to centrally set the properties of the parameter alarm are as follows:
1. Enter【Limit】interface in any of the following ways:
 Select 【Alarm Setup】 quick key.

7-4
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

 Select 【Main Menu】 quick key→from【Alarm】column to select【Limit】.

2. Select parameter submenu to set the alarm according to the required. You can
also set the alarm for individual parameters from the parameters menu.

7.6.2. Changing Alarm Setup Protection Mode

You can change the password protection mode of the alarm settings and arrhythmia
settings as follows:
1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select【Authorization】submenu.
3. Change the password protection mode of the alarm settings.
 【No Password】: Change alarm setups to not be password protected.
 【Password】: Change alarm switch, alarm limit and alarm level to be
protected by password.
If you use password to access alarm and arrhythmia alarm related settings, you can
set the valid time of the password, beyond which you need to re-enter the password. For
details, please refer to 5.9 Setting Password Valid Time.

7.6.3. Setting Alarm Sound Properties

7.6.3.1. Setting Alarm Volume

1. Enter【Setup】interface in either of the following ways:

 Select【Alarm Setup】quick key→Select【Setup】submenu.
 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Alarm】column to select 【Setup】.
2. Set 【Alarm Volume】. The alarm volume range is X-10, in which X is the
minimum volume, depending on the set minimum alarm volume, and 10 is the
maximum volume.
3. Set【High Alarm Volume】.
4. Set【Reminder Volume】.

NOTE：

7-5
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

 When the alarm volume is set to 0, the alarm tone will be turned off, and an
alarm audio off icon will appear on the screen.
 When the alarm volume is set to 0, the setting of high level alarm volume is
invalid.

7.6.3.2. Setting the minimum alarm volume

The minimum alarm volume determines the minimum alarm volume setting. The
steps are as follows:
1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select【Alarm】submenu→【Sound】submenu.
3. Select【Minimum Alarm Volume】.

NOTE：

 You can set the minimum alarm volume to 0 only when you are connected to
the CMS. If the monitor is not connected to the CMS, the minimum alarm
volume can only be set to 1.
 When the CMS is connected, if the minimum alarm volume is set to 0, the
minimum alarm volume will be automatically changed to 2 when the CMS is
disconnected.

7.6.3.3. Setting Alarm Tone Mode

The setting steps are as follows:

1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select【Alarm】submenu→【Sound】submenu→【Alarm Sound】, you can
select【ISO】.

7.6.3.4. Setting Alarm Tone Interval

You can set the alarm tone interval. The steps are as follows:
1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select

7-6
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.

2. Select【Alarm】submenu→【Sound】submenu.
3. Set 【High Alarm Interval】, 【Med Alarm Interval】 and 【Low Alarm
Interval】
.
 【High Alarm Interval】: 3～15s, and the default value is 10s.
 【Medium Alarm Interval】: 3～30s, and the default value is 20s.
 【Low Alarm Interval】: 16～30s，and the default value is 20s.

7.6.3.5. Setting Reminder Volume

When the alarm volume is 0, alarm reset or the alarm is off, the monitor can provide
periodic alarm prompt tone to remind you that there is still an activated alarm in the
current system. This function is turned on by default.
You can set the alarm tone as follows:
1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select【Alarm】button→【Pause /Reset】submenu.
3. Set 【Alarm Pause duration】
. You can set 【Alarm Pause duration】to
【1min】, 【2min】, 【3min】or【Permanent】, the default is【2min】
.
4. Set【Alarm Off Reminder】switch.
 【On】: The monitor provides an alarm tone according to the set interval.
 【Off】: The monitor does not provide an alarm tone.
5. . You can set 【Reminder Interval】to 【1min】,
Set 【Reminder Interval】
【2min】, 【3min】, 【5min】or【10min】, the default is【5min】
.

7.6.3.6. Setting Alarm Tone Enhancement

The monitor provides an alarm tone enhancement function. If the alarm exceeds the
set time and is not confirmed, the alarm volume can be automatically enhanced.
The steps to set the alarm tone enhancement are as follows
1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.

7-7
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

2. Select【Alarm】→【Sound】
.
3. Set【Auto Increase Volume】to【3 Steps】, 【2 Steps】, 【1 Steps】or
.
【Off】
 【 3 Steps 】 : After the alarm occurs, the alarm volume will be
automatically increased to level 3, if the set time is not confirmed.
 【 2 Steps 】: After the alarm occurs, the alarm volume will be
automatically increased to level 2, if the set time is not confirmed.
 【 1 Steps 】: After the alarm occurs, the alarm volume will be
automatically increased to level 1, if the set time is not confirmed.
 : After the alarm occurs, the set time is not confirmed, and the
【Off】
alarm volume remains unchanged.
4. Set【Increase Volume Delay】
, select sound enhanced delay time.

7.6.4. Setting Alarm Delay Time

For the over-limit alarm of continuous measurement parameters, the alarm delay
time can be set. If the condition of triggering alarm disappears within the delay time, the
monitor will not alarm.
Set the delay time for the alarm by following these steps:
1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select【Alarm】submenu→【Other】submenu.
3. Set【Alarm Delay】
.
The delay time of the apnea alarm is not affected by the alarm delay time setting.
You can set the delay time of the apnea alarm separately.

7.6.4.1. Setting Apnea Alarm Delay Time

Steps to set apnea alarm delay time are as follows:

1. Enter【Setup】interface in either of the following ways:
 Select【Alarm Setup】quick key→Select【Setup】submenu.
 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Alarm】column to select

7-8
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

.
【Setup】
2. Select【Apnea Delay】to set apnea alarm delay time.

7.6.5. Setting Alarm Waveform Length

You can set the length of the waveform needs to be output when an alarm occurs, the
setting steps are as follows:
1. Enter【Setup】interface in either of the following ways:

 Select【Alarm Setup】quick key→Select【Setup】submenu.

 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from 【Alarm】 column to select

【Setup】.

 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Report】column to select

【Record Setup】.
2. Set【Alarm Record Duration】.

7.6.6. Setting CMS Disconnect Alarm Switch

You can set whether to alarm when the monitor and the CMS are disconnected. This
function is enabled by default. The setting method is as follows:
1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select【Alarm】submenu→【Other】submenu.
3. Open or Close 【CMS Disconnected】.
When the 【CMS Disconnected】 switch is turned on, the technical alarm
will be generated when the monitor and the CMS are disconnected after
successful connection.

7.7. Alarm Pause

When the alarm is paused, it has the following characteristics:

 Shield all physiological alarms within the set time.
 The technical alarm sound is paused, but the alarm light and alarm
information are still displayed.

7-9
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

 Display the remaining time of alarm paused in the physiological alarm

information area.
 Display the alarm paused icon in the information area.
After reaching the alarm pause time, the monitor will automatically exit the alarm
pause state. You can also click 【Alarm Pause】quick key to manually cancel the alarm
pause.

7.7.1. Setting Alarm Pause Time

Alarm pause time can set to : 【2min】、【5min】、【30min】and【Permanent】,

the default is permanent. The steps to set the alarm pause time are as follows:
1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select【Alarm】submenu→ 【Pause /Reset】submenu.
3. Set【Alarm Pause Duration】.

7.7.2. Turn off all the Alarm

If 【Alarm Pause Duration】is set to 【Permanent】(Refer to section 7.7.1 Setting

Alarm Pause Time), you can press【Alarm Pause】quick key to turn off all alarms. When
the alarm is turned off, it has the following characteristics:
 No physiological alarm lamps flash and no physiological alarms are sounded.
 The technical alarm sound is turned off, but the alarm light and alarm
information are still displayed
 Display "Alarm Off" in the physiological alarm information area and the
background color is red.
 Display alarm off icon in status area.
To exit the alarm off state, click【Alarm Pause】quick key again.

WARNING：
 Pausing or turning off the alarm may cause the patient to be in danger, please
handle it carefully.

7-10
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

7.8. Alarm Reset

Click on【Alarm Reset】quick key to reset the alarm system, and the alarm reset icon
will appear in the system status information area.

NOTE：

 In the alarm reset state, if a new alarm is generated, the alarm reset icon
disappears and the alarm system is reactivated.

7.8.1. Physiological Alarm Reset

After the physiological alarm is reset, the sound of the currently existing
physiological alarm is shielded, and the other alarm states remain unchanged.

7.8.2. Technical Alarm Reset

When the technical alarm is reset, it has the following characteristics:

 The technical alarm that can be completely cleared is cleared. The monitor
will not have any alarm indication for the cleared technical alarm.
 Technical alarm that can clear sound and light is displayed as prompt
message.
 The sound of the technical alarm that cannot be cleared is shielded. For the
indication of the technical alarm after the alarm is reset, please refer to D.2
Technical Alarm.

7.9. Latching Alarms

The physiological alarms are classified into “Latching” and “Non-latching”.

 Non-latching alarms: After the condition that triggered the alarm of a
parameter disappears, the system will not make any prompt for this alarm of
this parameter.
 Latching alarms: Even if the condition that caused the physiological alarm
disappears, the alarm signal will still be “Latched”, and the time of the last
triggering of the alarm will be displayed behind the alarm information in the

7-11
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

information area.
 You can choose to individually lock the visual signal or simultaneously lock
the visual and audible signals.
 For visual latching, after the alarm condition disappears, the visual signal of
the alarm, including the alarm light, the alarm information and the
background color remain unchanged, and the alarm information text is
followed by the time of last triggering the alarm.
 For audible latching, the system still emits an alarm tone after the alarm
condition disappears.

The steps to latch the physiological alarm are as follows:

1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select【Alarm】submenu→【Latching】submenu.
3. Select how you want to latch the alarms. Alarm latching rules are as follows:
 You can separately select visual latching.
 Latching audible alarm signal simultaneously latches visual signal
corresponding to the alarm level.
 When a low priority alarm is latched, the high priority alarm is also
automatically locked. For example, if you select the low priority alarm,
the medium priority alarm and the high priority alarm will also be
latched simultaneously.

CAUTION：
 Changing of alarm priority may affect the latching status of corresponding
alarm. Please determine if you need to reset the latching status for the specific
alarm when you have changed its alarm priority.
 When the alarm system is reset, the latched physiological alarms are cleared.
 Do not set all alarm status to latching alarm signals when used in the intensive
care unit.

7.10. Nurse Call

The nurse call function means that when the alarm set by the user occurs, the monitor

7-12
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

can output a signal to the nurse call system, call the nurse. The monitor provides a nurse
call connector, and the monitor is connected to the nurse call system of the hospital
through the randomly provided nurse call cable. After the system is connected, the
connector can implement the nurse call function.
The nurse call function must be valid only if the following conditions are met:
 The nurse call function is turned on.
 A user-defined alarm occurs.
 The monitor is not alarm paused or off.

7.10.1. Changing Nurse Call Settings

To set the type and priority of alarms that are sent to the nurse call system, follow this
procedure:
1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select【Alarm】submenu→【Nurse Call】submenu.
3. Select【Signal Type】to set the type of nurse call signal.
 【Pulse】: The nurse call signal is a pulse signal and each pulse lasts one
second. When multiple alarms simultaneously occur, only one pulse
signal is outputted. If an alarm occurs but the previous one is not cleared,
a new pulse signal will also be outputted.
 【Continuous】: The nurse call signal lasts until the alarm ends. That is
to say the duration of a nurse call signal is equal to that of the alarm
condition.
4. Select 【Trigger Type】to set the work mode of the nurse call relay.
5. Select 【Alarm Priority】to set the priority of alarms sent to the nurse call
system.
6. Select 【Alarm Type】to set the type of alarms sent to the nurse call system.

WARNING：
 Do not rely exclusively on the nurse call system for alarm notification.

7-13
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Remember that the most reliable alarm notification combines audible and
visual alarm indications with the patient’s clinical condition.

7.11. Intubation Status

The monitor provides the intubation status function during RESP and CO2
monitoring. In this state, the physiological alarms related to RESP and CO2 are shielded,
and the alarm off icon is displayed in the parameter area. During the intubation process of
general anesthesia surgery, the intubation status can be selected to shield unnecessary
alarms.

7.11.1. Entering Intubation Status

To enter the intubation status, choose either of the following ways:

 Select【Intubation Status】quick key.
 From the bottom of the 【RESP】 or 【CO2】 menu to select 【Intubation
Status】 button.
 Select 【Main Menu】 quick key→from 【Alarm】 column to select
【Intubation Status】.

7.11.2. Setting Intubation Status Time

The default intubation time is 2 minutes. To change the time, following this
procedure:
1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select【Alarm】submenu→【Other】submenu.
3. Set【Intubation Duration】.

7.11.3. Exiting the Intubation Status

To exit the intubation status, choose either of the following ways:
 Select【Intubation Status】quick key.
 From the bottom of the 【RESP】 or 【CO2】 menu to select 【Exit

7-14
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Intubation Status】 button.

 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Alarm】column to select【Exit
Intubation Status】.

7.12. Other Bed Alarm

Enter other bed observation interface, and when the monitored bed monitor has an
alarm triggered, the alarm light and alarm sound are prompted according to the highest
level of all alarms of the current monitor and other bed monitor. You can view and
manage other bed alarm.
The alarm delay time from the device to other bed is≤2s.

7.12.1. Other Bed Alarm Reset

You can reset other bed alarm on the monitor. The steps to enable it to reset the bed
alarm are as follows:
1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select【Alarm】submenu→【Remote View】submenu.
3. Open【Reset Remote Bed’s Alarms】.
And then 【Bed View Settings (bed number)】 window→ 【Reset Remote Alarm】
button in the 【Alarm】 submenu will be activated. Click on 【Reset Remote Alarm】
button, other bed alarm will be reset.

CAUTION：
 Only when the “Alarm Reset By Other Bed” function of the remote monitor is
enabled, can you reset other bed alarm on this monitor

7.12.2. Authorizing the Alarm Reset to Other Devices

Alarms on your monitor can be reset by remote devices if you enable this function.
To do so, follow this procedure:
1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select

7-15
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.

2. Select【Alarm】submenu→【Remote View】submenu.
3. Open【Alarm Reset by Other Bed】switch.

7.12.3. Switching Off the Remote Device Disconnection Alarm

The monitor can provide an alarm if remote devices are disconnected. By default, the
function is enabled. To disable the alarm, follow this procedure:
1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select【Alarm】submenu→【Remote View】submenu.
3. Switch off【Remote Disconnected Alarm】.

7.13. Detecting Alarm

The monitor automatically performs a self-test at startup. Check that the alarm lamp
illuminates, one after the other, in red, yellow, and cyan, and that an alarm tone is heard.
This indicates that the visible and audible alarm indicators functions correctly.
To further test individual measurement alarms, perform measurements on yourself or
using a simulator. Adjust alarm limits and check that appropriate alarm behavior is
observed

7.14. Actions When an Alarm Occurs

When an alarm occurs, please refer to the following steps to take proper actions:
1. Check the patient’s condition.
2. Confirm the alarming parameter or alarm category.
3. Identify the source of the alarm.
4. Take proper action to eliminate the alarm condition.
5. Check if the alarm is eliminated.
For more information, please refer to D Alarm Information.

7-16
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Chapter 8 ECG
8.1. Introduction

The electrocardiogram (ECG) measures the electrical activity of the heart and
displays it on the monitor as waveforms and parameters. The monitor provides 3-lead,
5-lead, 6-lead, and 12-lead ECG monitoring, arrhythmia analysis, ST segment analysis
and QT/QTc measurements.

8.2. Safety Information

WARNING：
 This equipment is not intended for direct cardiac application.
 Make sure the conductive parts of electrodes and associated connectors for
applied parts, including the neutral electrode, should not contact any other
conductive parts including earth.
 Use defibrillation-proof ECG cables during defibrillation.
 Do not touch the patient or metal devices connected to the patient during
defibrillation.
 To reduce the hazard of burns during high-frequency surgical procedure,
ensure that the monitor’s cables and transducers never come into contact with
the electrosurgery unit (ESU).
 To reduce the hazard of burns during use of high-frequency surgical unit
(ESU), the ECG electrodes should not be located between the surgical site and
the ESU return electrode.

CAUTION：
 Only use parts and accessories specified in this manual. Follow the instructions
for use and adhere to all warnings and cautions.
 Regularly inspect the electrode application site to ensure skin quality. If there
are signals of allergies, replace the electrodes or change the application site.

8-1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

 Interference from a non-grounded instrument near the patient and

electrosurgery interference can cause problems with the waveform.

8.3. ECG Display

The following figures show the ECG waveform and parameter areas. Your display
may be configured to look slightly different.
 Waveform Display

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8
(1). ECG lead label
(2). ECG waveform gain
(3). ECG filter mode
(4). ECG waveform speed
(5). Paced status: If【Paced】is set to 【Yes】, is displayed; If【Paced】is set

to【No】, is displayed.
(6). Notch frequency
(7). Alarm message: Display only the highest level of alarm information.
(8). Pace pulse mark: If 【Paced】 is set to 【Yes】, the pace pulse markers are
shown on each ECG waveform when the patient has a paced signal.

8-2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

 Parameter Display
4
1
2

(1) Parameter label

(2) HR unit
(3) HR alarm limit: If the HR alarm is turned off, the alarm close icon is displayed here.
(4) HR value
(5) ECG signal quality index: Indicates the signal quality of the primary
calculation lead.

NOTE：

 The ECG parameter area and waveform area are configured to be different for
different lead type and ECG settings.

8.4. Preparing for ECG Monitoring

8.4.1. Preparing the Patient Skin

Proper skin preparation is necessary for good signal quality at the electrode sites, as the
skin is a poor conductor of electricity. Sites where leads are attached to the body must be
properly prepared to optimize contact.
Dogs and cats have enough electrolyte material on their skin and hair so that merely
moistening lead sites with 70% isopropyl alcohol is appropriate. This will usually be
sufficient for ECG monitoring for a short time, 30 to 60 minutes, depending upon the
relative humidity.
For monitoring during longer periods, an electrode paste should be used. It is best to
first wet the hair at the lead attachment site with alcohol; then place paste on the moistened

8-3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

hair and skin. It is important that the paste be in direct contact with skin. For animals with
dense undercoat, rub paste with fingers to assure that it has made contact with skin.

8.4.2. Applying Electrodes

To connect ECG cables, follow this procedure:

1. Attach the ECG leadwires to the clips prior to placement.
2. The clips are supplied with this monitor and they must open wide enough to
firmly but gently grasp the skin.
3. Connect the ECG leadwires to the patient cable.
4. Plug the patient cable into the ECG connector.

8.4.3. Lead Wire Color Code

The following table lists the 5-lead labels and colors for AHA and IEC standards:
IEC AHA
Lead
Label Color Label Color
Right arm R Red RA White
Left arm L Yellow LA Black
Right leg (neutral) N/RF Black RL Green
Left leg F Green LL Red
Chest C White V Brown
The following table lists the 6-lead labels and colors for AHA and IEC standards:
IEC AHA
Lead
Label Color Label Color
Right arm R Red RA White
Left arm L Yellow LA Black
Right leg (neutral) N/RF Black RL Green
Left leg F Green LL Red
Chest 1 Ca White Va Brown
Chest 2 Cb White Vb Brown

8-4
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

The following table lists the 12-lead labels and colors for AHA and IEC standards:
IEC AHA
Lead
Label Color Label Color
Right arm R Red RA White
Left arm L Yellow LA Black
Right leg (neutral) N/RF Black RL Green
Left leg F Green LL Red
Chest1 C1 White/ Red V1 Brown/ Red
Chest 2 C2 White/Yellow V2 Brown/Yellow
Chest 3 C3 White/Green V3 Brown/Green
Chest 4 C4 White/Brown V4 Brown/ Blue
Chest 5 C5 White/Black V5 Brown/ Orange
Chest 6 C6 White/ Purple V6 Brown/ Purple

8.4.4. ECG Electrode Placements

In this section, we adopt the AHA standard to illustrate electrode placement.

8.4.4.1. 3-lead Electrode Placement

Taking the AHA standard as an example, the 3-lead electrode placement position is
as shown:

 RA(right arm) lead: on the right foreleg.

8-5
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

 LA(left arm) lead: on the left foreleg.

 LL(left leg) lead: on the left hindleg.

8.4.4.2. 5-lead and 6-lead Electrode Placement

Taking the AHA standard as an example, the 5-lead electrode placement position is
as shown:

 RA (right arm) lead: on the right foreleg.

 LA (left arm) lead: on the left foreleg.
 RL (right leg) lead: on the right hindleg.
 LL (left leg) lead: on the left hindleg.
 V (precordial) lead: exploring lead.

NOTE：

 The exploring lead is used for diagnostic purposes as needed. Otherwise, it may
be left unplugged.

For 6-lead placement, you can use the position for the 5-lead placement, but with two
chest leads. The two chest leads (Va and Vb) can be placed according to the physician’s
preference.

8-6
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

8.4.4.3. 12-lead Electrode Placement

12-lead ECG uses 10 electrodes, which are placed on the patient’s four limbs and
chest. The limb electrodes should be placed on the soft skin and the chest electrodes
placed according to the physician’s preference.

8.4.4.4. Electrode Placement for Surgical Patients

While placing electrodes for a surgical patient, the type of surgery should be
considered, for instance, as to a chest surgery, the chest lead electrodes can be placed at
sides or backside of chest. Moreover, while using a surgical electrotome, in order to
reduce the influence of artifacts to ECG waveform, the electrodes can be placed at left and
right shoulders, close to left and right sides of abdomen; the chest lead electrodes can be
placed at left side of chest midst. Do not place the electrodes on the upper arm. Otherwise,
the ECG waveform will be very small.

WARNING：
 To reduce the hazard of burns during use of electrosurgical units (ESU), the
ECG electrodes should not be located between the surgical site and the ESU
negative electrode plate.
 Never entangle the ESU cable and the ECG cable together.
 When using ESU, never place ECG electrodes near to the negative electrode
plate of the ESU, as this can cause a lot of interference on the ECG signal.

8.4.5. Selecting ECG Lead Type

To select ECG lead type, follow this procedure:

1. Select ECG parameter area or waveform area to enter the【ECG】menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Set【Lead Type】according to the lead type you are going to use.
 【Lead Type】 is set as 【Auto】, the monitor automatically detects the
lead type.

8-7
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

8.4.6. Checking Paced Status

It is important to correctly set the paced status before you start monitoring ECG. The

paced symbol is displayed when【Paced】is set to【Yes】. The pace pulse markers
"│" are shown on each ECG waveform when the patient has a paced signal. If【Paced】is

set to【No】or the patient’s paced status is not selected, the symbol will be shown in
the ECG waveform area.
To change the paced status, follow this procedure:
1. Select ECG parameter area or waveform area to enter the【ECG】menu.
2. Select【Paced】submenu.
3. Set 【Paced】to be【Yes】or【No】. If you did not set the paced status, the
monitor issues a prompt tone when pace pulse is detected. At the same time,

the paced symbol flashes and the message prompt "Suspected Pacing
Signal". Check and set the patient’s paced status.

WARNING：
 For paced patients, you must set【Paced】 to【Yes】. If it is incorrectly set to
【No】, the monitor could mistake a pace pulse for a QRS complex and fail to
alarm when the ECG signal is too weak.
 False low heart rate or false asystole alarms may result with certain
pacemakers because of pacemaker artifacts, such as electrical overshoot of the
pacemaker overlapping the true QRS complexes.
 Do not rely entirely on rate meter alarms when monitoring patients with
pacemakers. Always keep these patients under close surveillance.
 For non-paced patients, you must set 【Paced】to 【No】.

8.4.7. Enabling Pacer Rejection

The pace pulse rejection function is disabled by default. To enable this function,
follow this procedure：
1. Select ECG parameter area or waveform area to enter the【ECG】menu.

8-8
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

2. Select【Paced】submenu.
3. Switch on【Pacer Reject】.

NOTE：

 When pace pulses are detected, the pace pulse marks “|” are shown on the
ECG waveforms. 【Pacer Reject】 setting has no impact on the display of pace
pulse marks “|”.
 You can switch on 【Pacer Reject】 only when 【Paced】 is set to 【Yes】.

8.5. ECG Settings

8.5.1. Selecting ECG Screen

When monitoring ECG, you can choose the screen as desired.

 For 3-lead ECG monitoring, only normal screen is available.
 For 5-lead ECG monitoring, besides the normal screen, it can be selected to
display 7 waveforms.
 For 6-lead ECG monitoring, besides the normal screen, it can be selected to
display 8 waveforms.
 For 12-lead ECG monitoring, besides the normal screen, it can be
selected to display 12 waveforms.
To choose the screen type, follow this procedure:
1. 【Screen Select】interface in one of the following ways:
 Select【Screen Setup】quick key→Select【Screen Select】submenu.
 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from 【Display】 column to select
【Screen Select】.
2. Select【ECG Screen】.

8.5.2. Setting ECG Alarm

To set ECG alarm properties, follow this procedure:

8-9
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

1. Select the ECG parameter area or waveform area to enter the【ECG】menu.

2. Select【Alarm】submenu.
3. If the alarm settings are password protected, enter the password. For details,
please refer to 7.6.2 Changing Alarm Setup Protection Mode.
4. Set alarms as needed.

8.5.3. Setting ECG calculating Lead

You can set the label name of the ECG calculation lead as follows:
1. Select ECG parameter area or waveform area to enter the【ECG】menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Select【ECG 1】or【ECG 2】 to set label name of ECG calculating Lead.

WARNING：
 Only when you switch on 【MultiLead Ana】can you set 【ECG 2】.

8.5.4. Setting Multi-lead Analysis

When multi-lead analysis function is switched on, the【ECG 2】participate in the

calculation of HR, the steps to set up the multi-lead analysis switch are as follows:
1. Select ECG parameter area or waveform area to enter the【ECG】menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Switch on or off【MultiLead Ana】.

CAUTION：
 【ECG 1】is the key calculation lead; 【ECG 2】is the auxiliary calculation lead.
Only when the ECG 【Lead Type】 is 5/6/12 lead can you set【MultiLead Ana】.

8-10
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

8.5.5. Setting ECG Waveform

8.5.5.1. Setting ECG Waveform Gain

If the ECG waveform is too small or clipped, you can change its amplitude by
selecting an appropriate gain setting. To do so, follow this procedure:
1. Select ECG parameter area or waveform area to enter the【ECG】menu.
2. Select【Gain】submenu.
3. Set the size of each ECG waveform. If you select【Auto】, the monitor
automatically adjusts the gain of the ECG waveforms.

8.5.5.2. Setting ECG Waveform Speed

To change ECG waveform speed, follow this procedure:

1. Select ECG parameter area or waveform area to enter the【ECG】menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Set【Wave Speed】.

8.5.5.3. Setting ECG Filter Mode

To set the ECG waveform filtering mode, follow this procedure:

1. Select ECG parameter area or waveform area to enter the【ECG】menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Set【Filter Mode】.
 : Use when diagnostic quality is required. The unfiltered
【Diagnose】
ECG waveform is displayed so that changes such as notch on R-wave,
ST elevation or depression, etc.
 【Monitor】: Use under normal measurement conditions.
 【Operation】: Use when the signal is distorted by high frequency or
low frequency interference. High frequency interference usually results
in large amplitude spikes making the ECG signal look irregular. Low
frequency interference usually leads to wandering or rough baseline.
The surgery filter reduces artifacts and interference from electrosurgical

8-11
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

units. Under normal measurement conditions, selecting 【Operation】

may suppress the QRS complexes.
 【ST】: It is recommended to use in ST segment analysis.
Filter status in various ECG modes：
Filter
Drift filter EMG filter Notch Filter
ECG mode
Diagnose Weak Weak Optional

Monitor Moderate Moderate On

Operation Intense Intense On

ST Weak Moderate Optional

NOTE：

 Under the mode of【Operation】and【Monitor】, the state of the filter cannot be

regulated. Only under the state 【Diagnose】and 【ST】 can adjust the notch
filter status. Please select 【Monitor】during monitoring a patient, select
【Operation】under the state of great interference.
 The diagnose mode has passed the distortion test.

8.5.5.4. Setting Notch Filter

The notch filter can eliminate power frequency interference. Follow the steps below
to turn the notch switch on or off:
1. Select ECG parameter area or waveform area to enter the【ECG】menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Switch on or off【Notch Filter】.

NOTE：

 Only the 【Filter Mode】is set to 【Diagnose Mode】 or 【ST】 can you switch

8-12
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

on or off【Notch Filter】, other mode is enabled by default.

8.5.5.5. Setting Notch Filter Frequency

According to the mains frequency of your country, you can set the frequency of the
notch to【50Hz】 or【60Hz】. If you need to change the 【Notch Frequency】, please
contact the manufacturer maintenance personnel.

8.5.6. Setting Smart Lead Switch

This monitor provides the function of switching main lead automatically. When
switch on 【Smart Lead】(Smart lead auto switchover), the current smart leads are
automatically identified by the algorithm, and the host automatically switches the smart
leads according to the identification of the algorithm.
Steps of switching off smart lead function are as follows:
1. Select ECG parameter area or waveform area to enter the【ECG】menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Switch off【Smart Lead】.

8.5.7. Setting the Priority of the ECG Lead Off Alarm

The steps to set the alarm level for ECG lead off alarms are as follows:
1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select【Alarm】submenu→【Other】submenu.
3. Set【ECG Lead Off Alarm Level】.

8.5.8. Adjusting the QRS Volume

The QRS volume is determined by【Alarm Source】in the ECG or PR alarm setting
menu. Which parameter (HR or PR) is set to【Alarm Source】and the QRS volume is
sounded according to which parameter's rhythm.
The volume of QRS sound can be set, the steps are as follows:
1. Select ECG parameter area or waveform area to enter the【ECG】menu.

8-13
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Set【QRS Volume】
When valid SpO2 measurements are available, the monitor adjusts the pitch tone of
QRS volume based on the SpO2 value. For detail, please refer to 10.5.5 Setting Pitch Tone.

8.5.9. Setting Multi-lead Signal Quality

The signal quality of the ECG waveform provides two display modes. The monitor
displays the signal quality of the main calculated lead waveform by default. You can set
the signal quality of the multi-lead waveform as required. The setting steps are as follows:
1. Select ECG parameter area or waveform area to enter the【ECG】menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Switch on【MultiLead Signal】.
Multi-lead Signal Quality: The color of the ECG signal of all leads is
indicated by the waveform color respectively. The five colors of white, red,
orange, yellow and green respectively correspond to the five signal quality
levels of extreme bad, bad, general, good and excellent.
When switch off【MultiLead Signal】,
Main-lead Signal Quality: The signal quality of the main calculation lead is
indicated by a triangular diagram of 5 grids, and 1 to 5 grids respectively
correspond to five signal quality levels of extreme bad, bad, general, good and
excellent. The signal quality is displayed above the icon (SQI) value, which
unit is "%".

8.5.10. Setting ECG Standard

Select the ECG standard according to the leads you are using. To select the ECG
standard, follow this procedure:
1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select【Module】submenu→【ECG】submenu.
3. Set【ECG Standard】to【AHA】or【IEC】.

8-14
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

8.6. Arrhythmia Monitoring

Arrhythmia analysis provides information about your patient’s condition, including

heart rate, PVC rate, rhythm and ectopics.

8.6.1. Safety Information

WARNING：
 Arrhythmia may affect heart rate. When monitoring arrhythmia patients, do
not rely entirely on the alarm information calculated by heart rate, but always
place the patients under close surveillance.
 Arrhythmia function is applicable for detecting certain ventricular and atrial
arrhythmias, not all atrial or supraventricular arrhythmias. Sometimes, it may
detect wrong arrhythmia. Therefore, doctors must combine more clinical
manifestations to analyze arrhythmia information.

CAUTION：
 Since the arrhythmia detection algorithm sensitivity and specificity is less than
100%, sometimes there may be some false arrhythmias detected and also some
true arrhythmia events may not be detected. This is especially true when the
signal is noisy.
 The amplitude of ECG waveform will affect the arrhythmia detection and
heart rate calculation sensitivity.
 If the QRS amplitude is too low, the monitor may not be able to calculate the
heart rate and false asystole may occur.
 Arrhythmia detection may not be available during ECG relearning. Therefore,
the patient’s state should be closely observed during ECG relearning and
within a few minutes after completion.

8.6.2. Arrhythmia Events

This section lists all arrhythmia events and their criteria.

8-15
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual
Arrhythmia Events Description
Asystole There is no fluctuation or very small and slow waveform for 6
seconds.
Vent Fib/Tach Ventricular fibrillation waveform for 4 seconds.
V-Tach More than 5 (including 5) ventricular waveforms were detected
continuously, and the heart rate was greater than the ventricular
tachycardia heart rate limit.
Vent Brady More than 3 (including 3) ventricular waveforms were detected
continuously, and the heart rate was less than the ventricular
bradycardia limit.
Extreme Tachy Non-ventricular rhythm and the heart rate are greater than the extreme
tachycardia limit.
Extreme Brady Non-ventricular rhythm and the heart rate are less than the extreme
bradycardia limit.
R on T Ventricular premature beats appear on the T wave of the previous
cardiac cycle.
Tachy Non-ventricular rhythm and the heart rate are greater than the
tachycardia limit.
Brady Non-ventricular rhythm and heart rate less than bradycardia limit.
Nonsustained V-Tach Three or four consecutive ventricular waveforms and the heart rate are
greater than the ventricular tachycardia heart rate limit.
Vent Rhythm More than 5 (including 5) ventricular waveforms were detected
continuously, and the heart rate was less than the ventricular
tachycardia heart rate limit and greater than the ventricular bradycardia
heart rate limit.
PNC One cardiac leak and one pacing pulse were detected.
PNP One cardiac leak was detected, but no pacing pulse was detected.
Pause No heartbeat is detected within 1.75× of the average R-R interval
(when the heart rate is less than 100), or no heartbeat is detected within
1 second (when the heart rate is more than 100) and the current RR
interval is greater than 4 seconds and less than 6 seconds.
Pauses/min High The number of Pause per minute is greater than the decision limit.
Run PVCs For 3 or 4 consecutive ventricular waveforms, the heart rate is less
than the ventricular tachycardia heart rate limit and greater than the
ventricular bradycardia heart rate limit.
Couplet Two consecutive ventricular waveforms.

8-16
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual
Arrhythmia Events Description
Bigeminy Dominant rhythm of N, V, N, V.
Trigeminy Dominant rhythm of N, N, V, N, N, V.
Frequent PVCs The number of PVC per minute is greater than the decision limit.
PVC Occasional ventricular premature beat.
Missed Beat No heartbeat is detected within 1.75× of the average R-R interval
(when the heart rate is less than 100bpm), or no heartbeat is detected
within 1 second (when the heart rate is more than 100bpm) and the
current RR interval is less than 4 seconds.
A-Fib RR interval of normal cardiac beats is irregular and there is no P wave.
A-Fib End No atrial fibrillation was detected within the delay time after the end of
atrial fibrillation.
ECG Noise There is too much noise to analyze the waveform.
Irregular Rhythm Always an irregular rhythm.
Irregular Rhythm End No irregular rhythm was detected within the delay time after the end of
the irregular rhythm.

8.6.3. Arrhythmia alarm settings

Use the following steps to set arrhythmia related alarms:

1. Select ECG parameter area or waveform area to enter 【ECG】 menu.
2. Select 【ARR】 submenu→【Alarm】 submenu.
3. If the arrhythmia setting is protected by a password, enter the password. For
details, please refer to 7.6.2 Changing Alarm Setup Protection Mode.
4. Set each arrhythmia alarm as required.

NOTE： The alarm level for lethal arrhythmia is always high and cannot be

changed by the user.

8.7. ST Monitoring

ST segment of ECG waveform refers to the phase from the end of ventricular
depolarization to the beginning of ventricular repolarization, or from the end of QRS
complex (point J) to the beginning of T wave. ST segment analysis is mostly used to

8-17
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

monitor the oxygen supply and myocardial viability of patients.

8.7.1. Safety Information

WARNING：
 Factors such drugs, metabolism or conduction disorders may affect ST values.
 Since ST is calculated by a fixed delay after point J, it may be affected by
changes in heart rate.
 The data accuracy of ST algorithm has been tested, and its clinical significance
should be decided by doctors.
 The monitor provides ST segment change information, and the clinical opinion
of this information should be decided by the doctor.

8.7.2. Enabling ST Monitoring

The ST segment analysis function is disabled by default. Please enable ST segment

analysis according to the following steps:
1. Select ECG parameter area or waveform area to enter 【ECG】 menu.
2. Select 【ST】 submenu→【Setting】 submenu.
3. Switch on the 【ST Analysis】. The following clinical situations may make it
difficult to obtain reliable ST monitoring:
 Lead with low noise cannot be obtained.
 Arrhythmia leading to irregular baseline exists, such as atrial
fibrillation/atrial flutter.
 The patient is continuously performing ventricular pacing.
 The patient has left bundle branch block.
When these situations exist, you should consider turning off the ST segment
analysis function.

8.7.3. Displaying ST parameter

The method of displaying ST parameters and waveforms is as follows:

1. Enter the 【Screen Layout】 page in one of the following ways:

8-18
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

 Select 【 Screen Setup 】 quick key→select 【 Screen Layout 】

submenu.
 Select 【Main Menu】 quick key→from 【Display】 column to select
【Screen Layout】.
2. Click on the location in the parameter area where ST parameters need to be
displayed, and select 【ECG】→【ST】. Depending on the type of lead you
are using, the ECG parameter area displays different ST parameters:
 When using 3-lead monitoring, an ST parameter value is displayed in
the ECG parameter area but not in the ST parameter area.
 When using 5-lead monitoring, the ST parameter area displays 7 ST
parameter values, namely ST-I, ST-II, ST-III, ST-aVR, ST-aVL,
ST-aVF and ST-V respectively.
 When 6-lead monitoring is used, the ST parameter area shows the same
values of 8 ST parameters, namely ST-I, ST-II, ST-III, ST-aVR,
ST-aVL, ST-aVF, ST-Va and ST-Vb.
 When 12-lead monitoring is used, the ST parameter area displays 12 ST
parameter values, namely ST-I, ST-II, ST-III, ST-aVR, ST-aVL,
ST-aVF, ST-V1, ST-V2, ST-V3, ST-V4, ST-V5, and ST-V6.

Take 5-lead as an example, the ST parameter area is shown as follows:

1
2

4 5

(1) Parameter label

(3) ST alarm off symbol
(2) ST unit
(4) Lead label
(5) ST numerics: a positive value indicates ST segment elevation, and a negative
value indicates ST segment depression.

8-19
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

8.7.4. Displaying ST Segment in Waveform Area

The steps for displaying ST segment in waveform area are as follows:

1. Enter the 【Screen Layout】 page in one of the following ways:
 Select 【 Screen Setup 】 quick key→select 【 Screen Layout 】
submenu.
 Select 【Main Menu】 quick key→from 【Display】 column to select
【Screen Layout】.
2. Click on the waveform area where you need to display ST segment, and select
【ECG】→【ST segment】 from the list.
The ST waveform area displays the current ST segment waveform and baseline
waveform, the current ST value and baseline value. Generally, the current ST segment
and parameter values are displayed in green, while the baseline segment and parameter
values are displayed in white.
1 2

6 5 4

(1) ST lead
(2) The current ST value
(3) ST baseline value
(4) The current ST segment (green) and baseline ST segment (white)
(5) ST segment measurement position line
(6) Scale

8.7.5. Entering ST View

ST View displays a complete QRS segment of each ST lead. You can enter 【ST
View】 to view these ST segments. The color of the current ST segment and ST value is

8-20
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

the same as that of ECG waveform, usually green. ST baseline segment and baseline
value are white.
You can select the ST waveform area to enter the 【ST View】 page or enter the 【ST
View】 page through the following steps:
1. Select ECG parameter area, waveform area or ST parameter area to enter
【ECG】 menu.
2. Select 【ST】 submenu.
3. Select 【ST View】 from the bottom of the menu.

8.7.6. Saving the ST Baseline

ST analysis requires valid samples. Set an ST baseline when ST values become stable.
If you do not set a baseline, the monitor will automatically save a set of baselines about 5
minutes after a valid ST measurement appears. You can also manually update the baseline
by selecting 【Set Baseline】 in the lower left corner of the 【ST View】 interface.
You can also make the following settings under the ST interface:
 Select 【Show Baseline】 or 【Hide Baseline】 to show or hide ST baseline
segments and parameter values.
 Select 【Show Mark】 or 【Hide Mark】 to show or hide ST reference point,
J point and ST point positions.

CAUTION：
 Changing the ST baseline will affect the ST alarm.

8.7.7. Entering ST Graphic Window

The steps to enter the ST Graphic window are as follows:

1. Select ECG parameter area, waveform area, ST parameter area or ST
waveform area to enter 【ECG】 menu.
2. Select 【ST】 submenu.
3. Select 【ST Graphic】 from the bottom of the menu.

8-21
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

The following figure shows ST Graphic. The height of the bar represents the ST
value of the corresponding ST lead. The color of the bar indicates the ST alarm status:
green indicates that the ST value is within the normal range; Cyan, yellow and red
indicate that the ST value exceeds the alarm limit. The alarm color corresponds to the
level of ST alarm.

8.7.8. ST Setup

8.7.8.1. Setting ST Alarm

ST alarm is set as follows:

1. Select ECG parameter area, waveform area or ST parameter area to enter
【ECG】 menu.
2. Select 【ST】 submenu→【Alarm】submenu.
3. Set the properties of ST alarm as required.

8.7.8.2. Showing ISO Point, J Point and ST Point Marks

The ISO point, J point and ST point position marks are not displayed by default on
the ST segment in the waveform area. To display these marks, the steps are as follows:
1. Select ECG parameter area, waveform area, ST parameter area or ST
waveform area to enter 【ECG】 menu.
2. Select 【ST】 submenu→【Setting】submenu.
3. Switch on 【ST Mark】.

8-22
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

8.7.9. Adjusting ST Measurement Point

8.7.9.1. ST Point, ISO Point and J Point

The ST value for each beat complex is the vertical difference between the isoelectric
(ISO) point and the ST point. The ISO point provides the baseline. The ST point is at the
midpoint of the ST segment. The J point is where the QRS complex changes its slope. As
the J point is a fixed distance away from the ST point, it can be useful to help you
correctly position the ST point.

(1) ISO Baseline Point (2) J Point (3)ST Measurement Point (4) ST Value

8.7.9.2. Setting ST Point, J Point and ISO Point

CAUTION：
 When you start monitoring or the patient's heart rate or ECG waveform has
obvious changes, it may affect the length of QT interval, thus affecting the
position of ST points, so the positions of ISO and ST points need to be adjusted.
Incorrect setting of ISO point or ST point may lead to false ST segment
depression or elevation. Please always ensure that the location of ST
measurement point is suitable for the patients under monitoring.

The steps for setting ST, J and ISO points are as follows:
1. Select ECG parameter area, waveform area, ST parameter area or ST
waveform area to enter 【ECG】 menu.
2. Select 【ST】 submenu→【Adjust】submenu.

8-23
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

3. Select 【ST Point】 to set the position of ST Point.

The setting of 【Auto Adjust】 defines the method of adjusting the ISO point and J
point. When the 【Auto Adjust】 switch is turned on, the module automatically adjusts
the positions of ISO and J points according to the current waveform. When the 【Auto
Adjust】 switch is off, you can manually adjust the positions of 【ISO】 and 【J】
through “+” and “-”.
 The ISO point (isoelectric) position is given relative to the R-wave peak.
Position the ISO point in the middle of the flattest part of the baseline
(between the P and Q waves).
 The J point position is given relative to the R-wave peak and helps locating
the ST point. Position the J point at the end of the QRS complex and the
beginning of the ST segment.
 The ST point is located at a fixed distance relative to the J point, and the J
point is moved so that the ST point is located in the middle of the ST segment.
The ST point can be located at the positions of J+0, J+20, J+40, J+60, and
J+80.

8.8. QT/QTc Monitoring

QT interval is the time from the beginning of QRS complex to the end of T wave, that
is, the whole period of ventricular action potential depolarization (QRS interval) and
repolarization phase (ST-T). QT test can help you to judge long QT interval syndrome.
QT interval is negatively correlated with heart rate. As heart rate increases, the QT
interval shortens, while at lower heart rates QT interval gets longer. We can use several
formulas to correct QT interval according to heart rate. The QT interval corrected by heart
rate is called QTc.

8.8.1. QT/QTc measurement limitation

The following conditions may affect the accuracy of QT measurement:

 The amplitude of R wave is too low.
 Excessive ventricular heartbeat.
 RR interval is unstable.
 High heart rate causes P wave to invade the end of the previous T wave.

8-24
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

 T wave is too flat or t wave boundary is unclear.

 The existence of U wave makes the end of T wave difficult to define.
 QTc measurement is unstable.
 In the presence of noise, asystole, ventricular fibrillation, and ECG lead off.
In the above situation, you need to select leads with good T wave amplitude, no
visible flutter, and no dominant U wave or P wave. In some cases, such as left and right
bundle branch block or cardiac hypertrophy, QRS complex may widen. If a long QTc is
observed, this should be confirmed to ensure that it is not caused by QRS broadening.
QT measurement cannot be performed in the presence of bigeminy rhythm because
normal cardiac beats are not included in the analysis when they are followed by
ventricular beats.
QT measurement cannot be performed when the heart rate is extremely high (over
180bpm). When the heart rate changes, it can take several minutes for the QT interval to
stabilize. In order to obtain reliable QTc calculation results, it is important to avoid areas
where the heart rate changes.

8.8.2. Enabling the QT/QTc Monitoring

QT/QTc monitoring function is off by default, and you need to turn it on before
performing QT/QTc monitoring. Enable QT/QTc monitoring as follows:
1. Select ECG parameter area or waveform area to enter 【ECG】 menu.
2. Select 【QT】 submenu→【Setting】submenu.
3. Switch on 【QT Analysis】.

8.8.3. Displaying QT/QTc Parameter

The method for displaying QT parameters and waveforms is as follows:

1. Enter the 【Screen Layout】 page in one of the following ways:
 Select 【Screen Setup】 quick key→select 【Screen Layout】submenu.
 Select 【Main Menu】 quick key→from 【Display】 column to select
【Screen Layout】.
2. Click on the location in the parameter area where QT parameters need to be
displayed and select 【ECG】→【QT】.

8-25
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

NOTE: QTc value is calculated based on QT-HR, not ECG-HR calculation

leads. You can enter QT View to view QT-HR. For details, please refer to
8.8.4 Entering QT View.

The QT parameter area is displayed as follows. Depending on the settings, the display
of your monitor may be different.
4

3
2 5

1
6

(1) QTc alarm limit (if QTc alarm is off, the alarm off icon is displayed here)
(2) Parameter Unit
(3) Parameter Label
(4) QTc value
(5) ΔQTc value (the difference between the current value of QTC and the baseline
value; if ΔQTc alarm is off, the alarm off icon is displayed on the right side of
the value)
(6) QT value

8.8.4. Entering QT View

QT View displays the current QT parameter values and waveforms, as well as

baseline/reference QT parameter values and waveforms. The steps to enter 【QT View】
are as follows:
1. Select QT parameter area to enter 【QT】 menu.
2. Select the 【QT View】 button at the bottom of the menu.
The following figure shows an example of QT View:

8-26
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

 The current waveform is displayed at the top of the view, and the color is the
same as the ECG waveform, usually green.
 The baseline segment is displayed below in white.
 The starting point of QRS complex and the ending point of T wave are marked
with vertical lines.
 In some cases, the algorithm may not be able to give QT measurement results
because the waveform does not meet the requirements. At this time, the reason
that cannot be analyzed will be displayed below the QT parameter area in QT
View. In addition, a prompt message "QT cannot be analyzed" will be
displayed in the technical alarm information area of the main interface.
 Select the lead label at the lower left of QT View, switch leads, and highlight
the waveforms of the corresponding leads.

8.8.5. Setting the QT Baseline

Setting QT baseline is helpful to quantify QTc changes. After QT valid values appear,
if you do not set QT baseline within 5 minutes, the monitor will automatically set QT
baseline.
The steps for manually setting QT baseline are as follows:
1. Select the 【Set Baseline】 button below QT View.
2. Select 【OK】 in the pop-up dialog box to set the current QT parameter value
as the baseline. The baseline value will be used to calculate the ΔQTc value.
After the new QT baseline is set, the original baseline will be discarded. The

8-27
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

baseline will be cleared when the patient is released.

Select 【Show Baseline】 or 【Hide Baseline】 to show or hide QT baseline
waveform.

CAUTION：
 Changing QT baseline will affect ΔQTc value and ΔQT alarm.

8.8.6. QT Setting

8.8.6.1. Setting the QT Alarm

QT alarm is set as follows:

1. Select QT parameter area to enter 【QT】 menu.
2. Select 【Alarm】 submenu.
3. Set properties of QTc and ΔQTc alarm.

8.8.6.2. Selecting QTc Formula

The monitor uses Hodges formula by default to correct QT interval according to heart
rate. If you need to select other QTc formulas, the steps are as follows:
1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select【Module】submenu→【ECG】submenu.
3. Select【QTc Formula】.
 Hodges:

 Bazett:

 Fridericia:

 Framingham:

8-28
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

8.9. Isoelectric Segments

Between the global onset and offset of the QRS-complex, signal parts with a duration
of more than 6 ms and amplitudes not exceeding 20μV for at least three samples should
be defined as isoelectric segments – I-wave before the global QRS-ONSET and K-wave
after the global QRS-OFFSET.
Isoelectric parts (I-wave) after global QRS-ONSET or before global QRS-OFFSET
(K-wave) are excluded in the duration measurement of the respective adjacent waveform.

8.10. ECG Relearning

Changes in ECG templates may result in erroneous arrhythmia alarms or/and

inaccurate heart rates.
The monitor provides ECG relearning function. ECG relearning enables the monitor
to learn new ECG templates to correct arrhythmia alarms and heart rate values. After
ECG relearning is completed, the monitor stores the QRS wave form obtained by learning
as a template as the normal ECG wave form of the patient. During ECG monitoring, when
you suspect abnormal arrhythmia alarm, you may need to start an ECG relearning.

8.11. Calibrating ECG

The ECG signal may be inaccurate due to hardware or software problems. As a result,

8-29
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

the ECG waveform amplitude becomes greater or smaller. In that case, you need to
calibrate the ECG module. To do so, follow this procedure:
1. Select ECG parameter area or waveform area, set 【 Filter Mode 】 to
【Diagnose】.
2. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.
3. Select【Module】submenu→【ECG】submenu.
4. Select【Calibrate】, the square wave signal will appear on the screen to
compare the amplitude of the square wave with the scale. The error range
should be within 5%. The ECG calibration must be completed by the
maintenance personnel.

8.12. Defibrillation Synchronization

The module provides an analog out connector to output defibrillation synchronization

signal. If a defibrillator is connected, it receives a synchronization pulse (100 ms, +5 V)
through the analog out connector each time an R-wave is detected.
The steps to set defibrillation synchronization are as follows:

1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select

【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.

2. Select【Module】submenu→【Auxiliary Output】submenu.

3. Set the defibrillation synchronization signal as needed.

CAUTION：
 Improper use of a defibrillator may cause injury to the patient. The operator
should determine whether to perform defibrillation or not according to the
patient’s condition.
 According to AAMI specifications the peak of the synchronized defibrillator
discharge should be delivered within 60 ms of the peak of the R-wave. The
signal at the ECG output on the monitors is delayed by maximum of 25ms.

8-30
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

8.13. ECG Troubleshooting

This section lists the problems that might occur. If you encounter problems when
using the monitor or accessories, check the table below before requesting for services. If
the problem persists after you have taken corrective actions, contact your service
personnel.

Problem Corrective Actions

1. Check that clips are not detached.
2. Check that leadwires are not defective. Replace leadwires if necessary.
Noisy ECG traces 3. Check that patient cable or leadwires are routed too close to other
electrical devices. Move the patient cable or leadwires away from
electrical devices.
Excessive
electrosurgical Use ESU-proof ECG cables.
Interference
Inadequate skin preparation, tremors, tense subject, and/or poor clip
placement.
Muscle Noise 1. Perform skin preparation again and re-place the clips. For more
information, see 8.4.1 Preparing the Patient Skin
2. Avoid muscular areas.
1. Check that cables are properly connected.
2. Check that clips are not detached. Perform skin preparation again as
Intermittent Signal described in 8.4.1 Preparing the Patient Skin.
3. Check that the patient cable or leadwires are not damaged. Change
them if necessary.
1. Check that clips are not detached. Perform skin preparation again and
replace the clips. For more information, see 8.4.1 Preparing the Patient
Excessive alarms:
Skin.
heart rate, lead fault
2. Check for excessive patient movement or muscle tremor. Reposition the
clips.
1. Check that the ECG gain is not set too low. Adjust the gain as required.
For more information, see 8.5.5 Setting ECG Waveforms.
Low Amplitude ECG
2. Perform skin preparation again and re-place the clips. For more
Signal
information, see 8.4.1 Preparing the Patient Skin.
3. Check clip application sites. Avoid bone or muscular area.

8-31
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Problem Corrective Actions

4. Check that clips are not dry or used for a prolonged time.
1. Check that the ECG gain is not set too low. Adjust the gain as required.
For more information, see 8.5.5 Setting ECG Waveforms.
2. Check that the leadwires and patient cables are properly connected.
No ECG Waveform
Change cable and leadwires.
3. Check that the patient cable or leadwires are not damaged. Change
them if necessary.

1. Check for excessive patient movement or muscle tremor. Secure

leadwires and cable.
Base Line Wander 2. Check that clips are not detached. For more information, see 8.4.1
Preparing the Patient Skin.

3. Check for ECG filter setting. Set ECG Filter mode to 【Monitor】.

NOTE: Physiological alarm and technical alarm information refer to D Alarm

Information.

8-32
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Chapter 9 Respiration Rate (RESP)

9.1. Introduction

Impedance respiration is measured across the thorax. When the patient is breathing,
the volume of air changes in the lungs, resulting in impedance changes between the
electrodes. Respiration rate (RR) is calculated from these impedance changes, and a
respiration waveform appears on the monitor screen.

9.2. Safety Information

WARNING:
 If you do not set the detection level for the respiration correctly in manual
detection mode, it may not be possible for the monitor to detect apnea. If you
set the detection level too low, the monitor is more likely to detect cardiac
activity, and to falsely interpret cardiac activity as respiratory activity in the
case of apnea.
 The respiration measurement does not recognize the cause of apneas. It only
indicates an alarm if no breath is detected when a pre-adjusted time has
elapsed since the last detected breath. Therefore, it cannot be used for
diagnostic purpose.
 If operating under conditions according to the EMC Standard IEC 60601-1-2
(Radiated Immunity 3V/m), field strengths above 3V/m may cause erroneous
measurements at various frequencies. Therefore, it is recommended to avoid
the use of electrically radiating equipment in close proximity to the respiration
measurement unit.
 The impedance respiration measurement may cause rate changes in Minute
Ventilation Rate Responsive Pacemakers. Set the pacemaker rate responsive
mode off or disable the impedance respiration measurement on the monitor.
 When using the electrosurgery unit, ensure proper contact of the ESU return
electrode to the patient to avoid burns at monitor measurement sites. Also
ensure that the ESU return electrode is near the operating area.

9-1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

CAUTION:
 Only use parts and accessories specified in this manual, and obey all warnings
and cautions.
 Respiration monitoring is not for use on the patients who are very active, as
this will cause false alarms.

9.3. RESP Display

1 2 3 4
6 7

8
5

(1) Parameter label (2) RESP waveform gain

(3) RESP lead (4) Resp waveform
(5) RR unit
(6) RR Alarm limits: If the respiration rate is turned off, the alarm off icon will be
displayed here.
(7) RR value (8) RR source

9.4. Placing RESP Electrodes

As the Respiration measurement adopts the standard ECG electrode placement, you
can use different ECG cables. Since the respiration signal is measured between two ECG
electrodes, if a standard ECG electrode placement is applied, the two electrodes should be
RA and LA, or RA and LL.
For more information, see 8.4.2 Applying Electrodes.

9-2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

RA-LA RA-LL

CAUTION：
 Correct electrodes placement can help to reduce cardiac overlay: avoid the
liver area and the ventricles of the heart in the line between the respiratory
electrodes.
 Some patients with restricted movements breathe mainly abdominally. In these
cases, you may need to place the left leg electrode on the left abdomen at the
point of maximum abdominal expansion to optimize the respiratory wave.
 In clinical applications, some patients expand their chests laterally, causing a
negative intrathoracic pressure. In these cases, it is better to place the two
respiration electrodes in the right midaxillary and the left lateral chest areas at
the patient’s maximum point of the breathing movement to optimize the
respiratory waveform.
 Regularly inspect the electrode application site to ensure skin quality. If there
are signals of allergies, change the clip application site.

9.4.1. Optimizing Lead Placement for Resp

If you want to measure Resp and you are already measuring ECG, you may need to
optimize the placement of the two electrodes between which Resp will be measured.
Repositioning ECG electrodes from standard positions results in changes in the ECG
waveform and may influence ST and arrhythmia interpretation.

9-3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

9.4.2. Cardiac Overlay

Cardiac activity that affects the Resp waveform is called cardiac overlay. It happens
when the Resp electrodes pick up impedance changes caused by the rhythmic blood flow.
Correct electrodes placement can help to reduce cardiac overlay: avoid the liver area and
the ventricles of the heart in the line between the respiratory electrodes.

9.4.3. Abdominal Breathing

Some patients with restricted movement breathe mainly abdominally. In these cases,
you may need to place the left leg electrode on the left abdomen at the point of maximum
abdominal expansion to optimise the respiratory wave.

9.4.4. Lateral Chest Expansion

In clinical applications, some patients expand their chests laterally, causing a negative
intrathoracic pressure. In these cases, it is better to place the two respiration electrodes in
the right midaxillary and the left lateral chest areas at the patient’s maximum point of the
breathing movement to optimize the respiratory waveform.

9.5. RESP Settings

9.5.1. Setting the RESP Alarm

To set the RESP alarm properties, follow this procedure:

1. Select the Resp parameter area or waveform area to enter the 【RESP】 menu.
2. Select【Alarm】submenu.
3. If the alarm setting is protected by password, enter the password. For detail,
please refer to 7.6.2 Changing Alarm Setup Protection Mode.
4. Set alarms as needed.

9.5.2. Selecting RR Source

You can select RR source, follow this procedure:

1. Select the RESP parameter area or waveform area to enter the 【RESP】menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.

9-4
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

3. Set【RR Source】. When you select【Auto】, the system automatically selects

the RR source according to the priority. RR source is first CO2, and then ECG,
and SpO2. When the current RR source does not have valid measurement, the
system automatically switches the【RR Source】to【Auto】.

9.5.3. Selecting Respiration Lead

You can set up respiration lead to get the best respiratory waveform. The steps to set
up breathing leads are as follows:
1. Select the RESP parameter area or waveform area to enter the 【RESP】menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Set 【RESP Lead】. If the respiratory waveform is still poor after adjusting the
respiration lead or the respiration rate measurement is suspected to be
inaccurate, you can adjust the electrode position.

9.5.4. Setting RESP Waveform Gain

You can adjust the RESP waveform gain to better view the waveform amplitude. The
steps to set the RESP waveform gain are as follows:
1. Select the RESP parameter area or waveform area to enter the 【RESP】menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Set【Gain】.

9.5.5. Setting the RESP Waveform Speed

To set the RESP waveform speed, follow this procedure:

1. Select the RESP parameter area or waveform area to enter the 【RESP】menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Set【Wave Speed】.

9.5.6. Setting the Auto Detection Switch

To set the auto detection switch, follow this procedure:

1. Select the RESP parameter area or waveform area to enter the 【RESP】menu.

9-5
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Switch on or off【Auto Threshold Detection】.
 If 【 Auto Threshold Detection 】 is switched on, the monitor
automatically adjusts the RESP waveform detection level, or threshold.
 【Auto Threshold Detection】is switched off, you have to manually
adjusts the RESP waveform threshold. For more information, see
9.5.7.Manually Adjust the RESP Waveform Detection Threshold.

9.5.7. Manually Adjust the RESP Waveform Detection Threshold

Use the manual detection mode in the following situations:

 The respiration rate and the heart rate are close.
 Patients have intermittent mandatory ventilation.
 Respiration is weak. Try repositioning the electrodes to improve the signal.
To set the Resp waveform threshold to the desired level, follow this procedure:
1. Select the RESP parameter area or waveform area to enter the 【RESP】menu.
2. Select【Threshold】submenu.
3. Select the up and down arrows below【Threshold】to define the Resp
waveform threshold. Once set, the detection level will not adapt automatically
to different respiration depths. It is important to remember that if the depth of
breathing changes, you may need to change the detection level.

9.6. RESP Troubleshooting

For more information, see D Alarm Information

9-6
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Chapter 10 SpO2
10.1. Introduction

Pulse Oxygen Saturation (SpO2) monitoring is a non-invasive technique used to

measure the amount of oxygenated haemoglobin and pulse rate by measuring the
absorption of selected wavelengths of light. The light generated in the emitter side of the
probe is partly absorbed when it passes through the monitored tissue. The amount of
transmitted light is detected in the detector side of the probe. When the pulsative part of
the light signal is examined, the amount of light absorbed by the haemoglobin is measured
and the pulse oxygen saturation can be calculated. This device is calibrated to display
functional oxygen saturation.

 Parameter Display 2 3

6
4

7
5 8

(1) Pleth waveform (Pleth): The amplitude of the waveform can directly reflect the
strength of the patient’s pulse signal. The waveform is not normalized.
(2) SpO2 value: Percentage of oxygenated hemoglobin in relation to the sum of
oxyhemoglobin and deoxyhemoglobin.
(3) Pleth bar: Proportional to the intensity of the pulse.
(4) SpO2 unit
(5) SpO2 alarm limits: If the SpO2 alarm is turned off, the alarm off icon is displayed
here.
(6) Perfusion index (PI): Applicable for SpO2 module. Gives the numerical value for
the pulsatile portion of the measured signal caused by arterial pulsation. PI indicates

10-1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

the signal strength of SpO2 and also partially indicates the signal quality.
 Above 1 is optimal;
 Between 0.3 and 1 is acceptable;
 Below 0.3 indicates low perfusion. If the PI is less than 0.3, the low perfusion
status is indicated (alternating with a question mark for SpO2 measurements),
indicating that the SpO2 measurements may be inaccurate. Reposition the
SpO2 sensor or find a better site. If low perfusion persists, choose another
method to measure oxygen saturation if possible.
(7) Pulse rate (PR) alarm off icon: pulse rate alarm is turned off.
(8) Pulse rate: the number of pulses detected per minute (from the pleth waveform)

10.2. Safety Information

WARNING:
 Use only SpO2 sensors specified in this manual. Follow the SpO2 sensor’s
instructions for use and adhere to all warnings and cautions.
 Before use, the operator needs to verify the compatibility between the monitor,
probe and cable. Otherwise, it may cause injury to the patient.
 When a trend toward patient deoxygenation is indicated, analyze the blood
samples with a laboratory co-oximeter to completely understand the patient’s
condition.
 Do not use SpO2 sensors during magnetic resonance imaging (MRI). Induced
current could potentially causes burns. The sensor may affect the MRI image,
and the MRI unit may affect the accuracy of the oximetry measurements.
 Prolonged continuous monitoring may increase the risk of undesirable changes
in skin characteristics, such as irritation, reddening, blistering or burns.
Inspect the sensor site every 2 hours and move the sensor if the skin quality
changes. Change the application site every 4 hours. For patients with poor
peripheral blood circulation or sensitive skin, inspect the sensor site more
frequently.
 Functional testers cannot be used to evaluate the accuracy of pulse oximetry
probes and pulse oximetry monitors.

10-2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

CAUTION:
 Use only specified accessories in this manual. Follow the instructions for use
and adhere to all warnings and cautions.

10.3. Monitoring Procedure

1. Selecting SpO2 Sensor

Depending on the animal category, weight and application site, you can select the
SpO2 sensor as required.
2. Connecting SpO2 Sensor

Plug the SpO2 sensor cable into the SpO2 connector on the measurement module.
3. Applying SpO2 Sensor

Place the sensor on the animal’s tongue or ear. For dogs, cats and equines, place the
sensor on their tongue. When placing the sensor, place the optical part of the sensor in the
center of the tongue. You can also place the sensor on the animal's lips, toes, ears, prepuce
and vulva.

CAUTION:
 Do not apply sensor too tightly as this results in venous pulsation which may
severely obstruct circulation and lead to inaccurate measurements.
 At elevated ambient temperatures be careful with measurement sites that are
not well perfused, because this can cause burns after prolonged application.
 Avoid placing the sensor on extremities with an arterial catheter, an NIBP cuff
or an intravascular venous infusion line.

10.4. Setting SpO2

10.4.1. Setting SpO2 Alarm

To change the SpO2 alarm settings, follow this procedure:

10-3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

1. Select the SpO2 parameter area or waveform area to enter the【SpO2】menu.

2. Select【Alarm】submenu.
3. If the alarm setting is protected by password, enter the password. For detail,
please refer to 7.6.2 Changing Alarm Setup Protection Mode.
4. Set alarms as needed.

10.4.2. Setting Sensitivity

The SpO2 value displayed on the monitor screen is the average of data collected
within a specific time. The shorter the averaging time is, the quicker the monitor responds
to changes in the patient’s oxygen saturation level. Contrarily, the longer the averaging
time is, the slower the monitor responds to changes in the patient’s oxygen saturation
level, but the SpO2 measurement is more stable. For critically ill patients, selecting
shorter averaging time will help understanding the patient’s state.
To set the averaging time, follow this procedure:
1. Select the SpO2 parameter area or waveform area to enter the【SpO2】menu.
2. Select【SpO2 Setup】submenu.
3. Select【Sensitivity】and then toggle between【High】,【Med】or【Low】.

10.4.3. Setting NIBP measurement on the same limb

When monitoring SpO2 and NIBP on the same limb simultaneously, you can switch
on 【NIBP Simul】 to lock the SpO2 alarm status until the NIBP measurement ends. If
you switch off 【NIBP Simul】, low perfusion caused by NIBP measurement may lead to
inaccurate SpO2 readings and therefore cause false physiological alarms.
To set the 【NIBP Simul】, follow this procedure:
1. Select the SpO2 parameter area or waveform area to enter the【SpO2】menu.
2. Select【Alarm】submenu.
3. Set【NIBP Simul】as to【On】or【Off】.

10.4.4. Changing the Speed of Pleth Waveform

To set the sweep speed of Pleth waveforms, follow this procedure:

1. Select the SpO2 parameter area or waveform area to enter the【SpO2】menu.

10-4
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

2. Select 【SpO2 Setup】 submenu.

3. Set 【Wave Speed】 to the appropriate value. The larger the value, the faster
the scanning speed and the wider the waveform.

10.4.5. Setting Pitch Tone

The pitch tone function is on by default. The steps to turn off the pitch tone function
are as follows:
1. Select the SpO2 parameter area or waveform area to enter the【SpO2】menu.
2. Select【SpO2 Setup】submenu.
3. Switch off【Pitch Tone】.

10.4.6. Setting PI Display

You can switch on or off PI display by following these steps:

1. Select the SpO2 parameter area or waveform area to enter the【SpO2】menu.
2. Select【SpO2 Setup】submenu.
3. Set【Display PI】as to【On】or【Off】.

10.5. Setting PR

10.5.1. Setting PR Alarm

You can set PR alarm by following these steps:

1. Select the SpO2 parameter area or waveform area to enter the【SpO2】menu.
2. Select【PR Alarm】submenu.
3. Set alarms as needed.

10.5.2. Setting QRS Volume

If the alarm source is set to PR, the QRS tone is derived from PR measurements. To
set the QRS volume, follow this procedure:
1. Select the SpO2 parameter area or waveform area to enter the【SpO2】menu.
2. Select【PR Setup】submenu.
3. Set【QRS Volume】to the appropriate value.

If the SpO2 value is effective, the monitor also adjusts the QRS tone (Pitch tone)

10-5
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

according to the SpO2 value. For information, see 10.5.5 Setting Pitch Tone.

10.5.3. Setting PR Source

Current pulse source is displayed in the PR parameter area. The PR from current pulse
source has the following characteristics:
 PR is monitored as system pulse and generates alarms when you select PR as
the active alarm source;
 PR is stored in the monitor’s database and reviewed in the graphic/tabular
trends; in trend graphs, as the PR curve is in the same color with that of the
PR source, it is unlikely to distinguish the PR source.
To set which pulse rate as PR source, follow this procedure:
1. Select the SpO2 parameter area or waveform area to enter the【SpO2】menu.
2. Select【PR Setup】submenu.
3. Select【PR Source】, and select a suitable PR source in the drop-down list.
The drop-down list of 【PR Source】displays the currently valid PR source from top
to bottom according to the priority level. When you select【Auto】, the system will
automatically select the first option in the list as the PR source. If the PR source you set
does not exist, the system will automatically switch【PR Source】to【Auto】. When you
select 【IBP】, the system will automatically use the first pressure label in the list as the
PR source.

10.6. SpO2 Measurement Limitations

If you doubt the SpO2 measurements, check the patient’s vital signs first, then check
the monitor and SpO2 sensor. The following factors may influence the accuracy of
measurements:
 There is excessive illumination from light sources such as a surgical lamp, a
brilirubin lamp, or sunlight;
 Excessive patient movement;
 Diagnostic test;
 Low perfusion;
 Electromagnetic interference, such as MRI device;
 Electrosurgical equipment;

10-6
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

 Concentration of nonfunctional hemoglobin, such as carbonyl hemoglobin

(COHb) and methemoglobin(MetHb);
 The presence of certain dyes, such as methylene blue or indigo carmine;
 Improper placement or incorrect use of pulse oximeter probe;
 Shock, anemia, hypothermia or use of vasoconstrictor drugs, which can cause
blood flow in the arteries to drop to unmeasurable levels.

10-7
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Chapter 11 Temperature（TEMP）

11.1. Introduction

The thermistor is applied on continuous temperature measurement, which is based on

the principle that electrical resistance of the thermistor changes as temperature changes.
Thermistors measure the resistance change and use it to calculate the temperature.
Depending on the model of the different monitors you are using, you can measure
the body temperature of up to two temperature sites and calculate the difference between
two measured sites（△T）.
Measuring mode is direct mode.

11.2. Displaying the TEMP Parameter Area

To display the Temp parameters area, follow this procedure:

1. Enter【Screen Layout】interface in either of the following ways:
 Select【Screen Setup】quick key→Select【Screen Layout】submenu.
 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Display】column to select【Screen
Layout】.
2. Select you want to display the parameter area of the temperature parameters,
and then from the popup list select【TEMP】.

11.3. TEMP Display

The following figure shows the TEMP parameter area for temperature monitoring.
Your display may be configured to look different.
1
2

4 5
(1) Parameter label
(2) TEMP unit
(3) TEMP alarm limits: If TEMP alarm is turned off, the alarm closing icon is displayed

11-1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

here.
(4) TEMP value
(5) TEMP Difference (ΔT): TEMP Difference between two temperature sites. It displays
only when ΔT is switched on.

11.4. Preparing for TEMP Monitoring

Please follow these steps to prepare TEMP measurement:

1. According to the type of patient and the measurement site, select the
appropriate temperature probe.
2. Insert the probe or extension cable into the temperature probe connector. If a
disposable probe is used, connect the probe and extension cable.
3. Attach the probe to the patient correctly.
4. Select an appropriate temperature label.

11.5. TEMP Settings

11.5.1. Setting TEMP Alarm

To set the temperature alarm, follow this procedure:

1. Select the TEMP parameter area to enter the 【TEMP】menu.
2. Select【Alarm】submenu.
3. If the alarm setting is protected by password, enter the password. For detail,
please refer to 7.6.2 Changing Alarm Setup Protection Mode.
4. Set alarms as needed.

11.5.2. Setting TEMP Label

Select the temperature label according to the measurement site. To do so, follow this
procedure：
1. Select the TEMP parameter area to enter the【TEMP】menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Set the TEMP label name according to the measurement site.

11-2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

11.5.3. Displaying the Temperature Difference

To display the temperature difference between two measurement sites monitored by

the same temperature module, switch on corresponding ΔT. To do so, follow this
procedure:
1. Select the TEMP parameter area to enter the 【TEMP】menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Switch on △T.

11.5.4. Setting TEMP Unit

You can change the unit of TEMP by following the steps below:
1. Select the TEMP parameter area to enter the【TEMP】menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Set TEMP【Unit】.

11.6. TEMP Troubleshooting

This section lists the problems that might occur. If you encounter the problems when
using the equipment or accessories, check the table below before requesting for services.
If the problem persists, contact your service personnel.

NOTE: For the physiological and technical alarm messages, see D Alarm

Information.

Problem Corrective Actions

Do not display TEMP parameter 1. Check if the display of the TEMP parameter is set in
area on the main screen.
【Screen Setup】menu.

2. Check that if the TEMP parameter switch is enabled.

For more information, see 3.6.1 Setting Parameters.

3. Check that if the connections of the temperature probe

and the extension cable are tight.
Measurement fails / "--" is 1. If you are using a disposable probe, check whether the

11-3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Problem Corrective Actions

displayed in the Temp parameter probe is tightly connected to the extension cable.
area. 2. Try using a known good probe in case the sensor is
damaged

11-4
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Chapter 12 NIBP
12.1. Introduction

The monitor uses the oscillometric method for measuring the non-invasive blood
pressure (NIBP). NIBP measurement is based on the principle that pulsatile blood flow
through an artery creates oscillations of the arterial wall. The oscillometric device uses a
blood pressure cuff to sense these oscillations that appear as tiny pulsations in cuff
pressure. The oscillometric devices measure the amplitude of pressure changes in the
occluding cuff as the cuff deflates from above systolic pressure. The amplitude suddenly
increases as the pulse breaks through the occlusion in the artery. As the cuff pressure
decreases further, the pulsations increase in amplitude, reach a maximum (which
approximates to the mean pressure), and then diminish. The oscillometric method
measures the mean pressure and determines the systolic and diastolic pressures.

NOTE:

 Blood pressure measurements determined with this device are equivalent to

those obtained by a trained observer using the cuff/stethoscope auscultatory
method or an intra-arterial blood pressure measurement device, within the
limits prescribed by IEC 80601-2-30.
 NIBP measurement can be performed during electro-surgery and discharge of
defibrillator.

12.2. Safety Information

WARNING:
 Be sure to select the correct patient category setting for your patient before
NIBP measurement.
 Do not measure NIBP on patients with sickle-cell disease or on the limb where
skin damage has occurred or is expected.
 Use clinical judgment to determine whether to perform frequent automatic

12-1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

blood pressure measurements on patients with severe blood clotting disorders

because of the risk of hematoma in the limb fitted with the cuff.
 Do not use the NIBP cuff on a limb with an intravenous infusion or arterial
catheter in place. This could cause tissue damage around the catheter when the
infusion is slowed or blocked during cuff inflation.
 Continuous cuff pressure due to connection tubing kinking may cause blood
flow interference, and resulting in harmful injury to the patient.
 NIBP reading can be affected by the measurement site, the position of the
patient, exercise, or the patient's physiologic condition. If you doubt the NIBP
measurements, determine the patient’s vital signs by alternative means, and
then verify that the monitor is working correctly.
 Devices that exert pressure on tissue have been associated with purpura,
ischemia, and neuropathy. Inspect the application site regularly to ensure skin
quality and inspect the extremity of the cuffed limb for normal color, warmth
and sensitivity. If the skin quality changes, or if the extremity circulation is
being affected, move the cuff to another site or stop the blood pressure
measurements immediately. Check more frequently when making automatic or
STAT measurements. Auto NIBP measurements with one and two minute
intervals are not recommended for extended periods of time.
 NIBP diagnostic significance must be decided by the physician.
 As the monitor uses an alternative small-bore connector design different from
those specified in the ISO 80369 series, there is a possibility that a
misconnection can occur between the monitor and a medical device using a
different alternative small-bore connector, which can result in a hazardous
situation causing harm to the patient. Special measures need be taken by the
user to mitigate these reasonable foreseeable risks.

CAUTION:
 Only use parts and accessories specified in this manual. Follow the instructions
for use and adhere to all warnings and cautions.
 Accuracy of NIBP measurement depends on using a cuff of proper size. It is
essential to measure limb circumference and choose a cuff with proper size.

12-2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

 NIBP automatically calibrated every time when the monitor is turned on. If it
is not turned off for a long time or if the pressure is not accurate during use,
you can use the “Reset” function in the NIBP menu to calibrate. You need to
remove the cuff and windpipe before calibration, which in order to connect the
NIBP pressure sensor to the atmosphere.

12.3. NIBP Measurement Limitations

Measurements are impossible with heart rate extremes of less than 40bpm or greater
than 240bpm, or if the patient is on a heart-lung machine. The measurement may be
inaccurate or impossible in the following situations:
 Regular arterial pressure pulses are hard to detect;
 With excessive and continuous patient movement such as shivering or
convulsions;
 With cardiac arrhythmias;
 With rapid blood pressure changes;
 With severe shock or hypothermia that reduces blood flow to the peripheries;
 On an edematous extremity;

12.4. Measurement Modes

The monitor has the following NIBP measurement modes:

 Manual: Manually start a NIBP measurement.
 Auto: The monitor automatically and repeatedly performs NIBP
measurements at set intervals.
 STAT: With 5 minutes, the measurement is continuously performed, and then
the monitor returns to the original mode.
 Sequence: The monitor measures automatically according to the set cycle
length and interval.

12-3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

12.5. NIBP Display

The NIBP display shows only numerics.

3 4 5

1
2

12 6

11 10 9 8 7

(1) Parameter Label

(2) NIBP Unit: mmHg or kPa
(3) The last NIBP measurement time
(4) Time to the next measurement (for Auto mode and Sequence only).
(5) Measurement mode: The measurement interval time is displayed during Auto NIBP
measurement, and the current measurement period and measurement interval time are
displayed during Sequence measurement.
(6) Pulse rate: the number of pulses detected per minute (from the pressure waveform of
cuff)
(7) Mean pressure alarm limit
(8) Mean pressure (displayed after measurement completed) or cuff pressure (displayed
during the measurement)
(9) Diastolic pressure alarm limit
(10) Diastolic pressure
(11) Systolic pressure
(12) Systolic pressure alarm limit

NOTE:

 If NIBP measurement fails, "XX" is displayed; if NIBP measurement is not

12-4
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

taken, "--" is displayed

 Outlined NIBP numerics indicate that the measurement exceeds the set time.
So these NIBP values are not recommended for reference.

12.6. Preparing for NIBP Measurements

1. Verify that the patient category setting is correct.

2. Connect the airpipe to the NIBP cuff connector of the device.
3. Select an appropriately sized cuff for the patient, and then apply it as follows:
a) Determine the patient’s limb circumference.
b) Select an appropriate cuff by referring to the limb circumference marked
on the cuff. The width of the cuff should be 50% of the limb
circumference, or 2/3 of the length of the upper arm. The inflatable part
of the cuff should be long enough to encircle at least 50% to 80% of the
limb.
c) Apply the cuff to the patient’s upper arm or leg and make sure the Φ
marking on the cuff matches the artery location. Do not wrap the cuff
too tightly around the limb. Otherwise it may cause discoloration and
ischemia of the extremities. Make sure that the cuff index line falls
within the range markings on the cuff. If it does not, use a larger or
smaller cuff that will fit better.
d) Middle of the cuff should be at the level of the right atrium of the heart.
4. Connect the cuff to the air tubing. Avoid compression or restriction of
pressure tubes. Air must pass unrestricted through the tubing.

CAUTION：
 A wrong cuff size and a folded or twisted bladder can cause inaccurate
measurements.
 Do not touch or apply external pressure against the cuff and air tubing during
NIBP measurement. This may cause inaccurate blood pressure values.
 Use care when placing the cuff on an extremity used for monitoring other
patient parameters. Pressurization of the cuff may temporarily cause loss of

12-5
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

function of simultaneously used monitoring equipment on the same limb.

Details about the cuff sites on different animals are as follows.

 Cuff placement for a cat
A cat may be left in its owner’s lap to keep it calm. Measurements are best done in an
area of the hospital away from noise and bright lights. The animal may be held so that the
front limbs are free for cuff placement. In conscious animals, the tail may be the most
appropriate location for placement of the cuff. Cats may be most comfortable in sternal
recumbency making the tail a more preferable site.
For the median artery on the foreleg, place the cuff around the forelimb, between the
elbow and carpus. It is not necessary to center the cuff over the artery which is on the
medial side of the leg because of the fully encircling bladder design. Hair need not be
clipped except when heavily matted. In cats less than five pounds when measurements are
difficult to obtain, place the cuff around the leg above the elbow to obtain measurements
from the brachial artery. Measurements from the coccygeal artery may be used by placing
the cuff around the base of the tail but not in anesthetized animals.

Cat cuff placement

 Cuff placement for a dog
For measurements in dogs, it is preferable to use the right lateral, sternal or dorsal
recumbent positions. That is not a problem in anesthetized animals, but it may be difficult
to get large dogs to cooperate for proper positioning. If the dog is in a sitting position,
place the front paw on the operator’s knee and take measurements from the metacarpus.
Sites for cuff placement are the metacarpus, metatarsus and anterior tibial. In
anesthetized animals, most surgeries are done on the posterior part of the body so the
metacarpal area of the forelimb is most convenient. In situations where this is not possible,

12-6
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

the cuff should be wrapped around the metatarsus just proximal to the tarsal pad or around
the hind leg just distal to the hock. The tail site should not be used for cuff placement
during anesthesia.
It is not necessary to center the cuff over the artery because of the fully encircling
bladder design. If the hair over the artery site is too thick or matted for good contact, it
should be clipped.

dog cuff placement

 Other big animals
A big animal such as a horse should be in a stock, standing still, or lying down.
For horses and cows, the cuff can be wrapped around the base of the tail using the
coccygeal artery on the ventral surface.

12.7. Starting and Stopping NIBP Measurements

Start and stop NIBP measurement by selecting the NIBP quick key keys or from the
NIBP menu:
Task Via quick key Via NIBP menu
Start a manual
Select【NIBP Start/Stop】quick key Select【Start】
measurement
Select【Setup】
NIBP Auto Select【NIBP Measure】quick
submenu→set【Interval
measurement
key →Select interval time
Time】

Select【Sequence】
Select【NIBP Measure】quick
submenu→set NIBP
NIBP Sequence
key →Select【Sequence】→Select Sequence
measurement
measurement→Select
【NIBP Start/Stop】quick key
【Start】

12-7
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual
Task Via quick key Via NIBP menu
Start STAT Select【STAT】
Select【NIBP STAT】quick key
measurement

Stop the current NIBP Select【NIBP Start/Stop】quick

Select【Stop】
measurements key
End Auto NIBP or
Sequence Select【NIBP Stop All】quick key Select【Stop All】
measurement
Stop STAT
Select【NIBP Start/Stop】quick key Select【Stop】or 【Stop All】
measurement

12.8. NIBP Settings

12.8.1. Setting the NIBP Alarm

To set the NIBP alarm properties, follow this procedure:

1. Select the NIBP parameter area to enter the【NIBP】menu.
2. Select【Alarm】submenu.
3. If the alarm setting is protected by password, enter the password. For detail,
please refer to 7.6.2 Changing Alarm Setup Protection Mode.
4. Set alarms as needed.

12.8.2. Setting the Initial Cuff Inflation Pressure

You can manually set the initial inflation pressure of the cuff, follow this procedure:
1. Select the NIBP parameter area to enter the【NIBP】menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Set【Initial Pressure】: Select the appropriate cuff pressure value as needed.

12.8.3. Setting the NIBP Interval

For Auto NIBP measurement, you need to set the interval between two NIBP
measurements. To set the NIBP interval, follow this procedure:
1. Select the NIBP parameter area to enter the【NIBP】menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.

12-8
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

3. Set【Interval Time】.

12.8.4. Selecting NIBP Start Mode

Start mode defines how NIBP auto mode works. To set the 【Start Mode】, follow
this procedure:
1. Select the NIBP parameter area to enter the【NIBP】menu
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Set【Start Mode】.
 【Clock】: After the first measurement, the monitor automatically
synchronizes NIBP automatic measurements with the real time clock.
For example, if 【Interval】 is set to 【30min】, and you start NIBP auto
measurement at 10:03, the next measurement will be taken at 10:30, and
then at 11:00, 11:30, and so on.
 【Interval】: After the first measurement, the monitor automatically
repeats measurements at set interval. For example, if 【Interval】 is set
to【30min】, and you start NIBP auto measurement at 10:03, the next
measurement will be taken at 10:33, and then at 11:03, 11:33, and so on.

12.8.5. Enabling the NIBP End Tone

The monitor can issue a reminder tone at the completion of NIBP measurement. The
NIBP End Tone is off by default. To switch on the NIBP end tone, follow this procedure:
1. Select the NIBP parameter area to enter the【NIBP】menu
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Switch on【NIBP End Tone】.

12.8.6. Setting NIBP Sequence Measurement

NIBP sequence measurements can consist of up to 5 measurement periods: A, B, C,

D, and E. You can set the measurement duration for each period and the interval between
NIBP measurements in each period separately. The steps to set up the NIBP measurement
sequence are as follows:

12-9
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

1. Select the NIBP parameter area to enter the【NIBP】menu.

2. Select【Sequence】submenu.
3. Set each sequence measurement to【Duration】or【Interval Time】separately.

12.8.7. Setting NIBP Unit

You can change the NIBP units by following these steps:

1. Select the NIBP parameter area to enter the【NIBP】menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Set NIBP【Unit】.

12.8.8. Setting NIBP Invalid Time

NIBP measurements become outline fonts after a preset time. This avoids older NIBP
values being misinterpreted as current measurements. To set the timeout period, follow
this procedure:
1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select【Module】submenu→【Other】submenu.
3. Set【NIBP Invalid Time】.

12.8.9. Displaying the NIBP List

To display multiple sets of the latest NIBP measurements, follow this procedure:
1. Enter【Screen Layout】submenu by either of the following ways:
 Select【Screen Setup】quick key→Select【Screen Layout】submenu.
 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from 【Display】 column to select
【Screen Layout】.
2. In the desired parameter area, select【NIBP】→【NIBP List】.

12.9. Assisting Venous Puncture

You can use the NIBP cuff to cause sub-diastolic pressure to block the venous blood
vessel and therefore help venous puncture. To assist venous puncture, follow this

12-10
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

procedure:
1. Select the NIBP parameter area.
2. Select【Setup】submenu；
3. Set【Assisted Venipuncture Pressure】.
4. Select【Assisted Venipuncture】at the bottom of the menu.
5. Puncture vein and draw blood sample.
6. Select【NIBP Start/Stop】quick key or【Assisted Venipuncture】button to
manually deflate the cuff. When performing a venipuncture, observe the inflation pressure
and the remaining time of the venipuncture in the NIBP parameter area.

12.10. NIBP Maintenance

12.10.1. NIBP Leakage Test

The NIBP leakage test checks the integrity of the system and of the valve. The NIBP
leakage test should be performed once every two years or when you doubt the NIBP
measurements. The NIBP leakage test should be performed by qualified service personnel
only.

12.10.2. NIBP Calibration

The NIBP accuracy test should be performed once every two years or when you
doubt the NIBP measurements. The NIBP accuracy test should be performed by qualified
service personnel only.

12.11. NIBP Troubleshooting

For more information, see D Alarm Information.

12-11
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Chapter 13 IBP
13.1. Introduction

The method of IBP measurement is direct measuring the BP of artery or veins on the
pressure sensor mainly through liquid coupling so as to obtain the pressure curve of the
continuous BP.
The monitor can provide up to 2 channels of IBP measurement results.

13.2. Safety information

WARNING:
 Use only IBP transducers specified in this manual. Never reuse disposable
pressure transducers.
 The operator should avoid contact with conductive parts of the accessories
when being connected or applied.
 When the monitor is used with HF surgical equipment, the transducer and the
cables must be avoided conductive connection to the HF equipment to protect
against burns to the patient.
 All invasive measurement involves risks to the patient. Use aseptic technique
and perform according to manufacturer’s instructions during measurement.
 Mechanical shock to the IBP sensor may cause severe shifts in zero balance and
calibration, and cause erroneous readings.

13-1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

13.3. IBP measurement

13.3.1. Monitoring Procedure

Please make an IBP measurement following below steps:

1. Plug one end of the IBP sensor cable into the monitor's IBP cable connector
and the other end link to the IBP sensor.
2. Refers to the IBP sensor manufacturer's instructions for exhausting air in the
IBP sensor, it make ensure no air bubbles in the sensor's entire tube.
3. Connecting IBP sensor to the patient, which makes sure the sensor and heart at
the same level.
4. Selecting correct pressure label based on the measured pressure. Specifically,
please refer to 13.5.2 Change the pressure label.
5. Refers to 13.3.2 IBP Sensor Zero for zeroing. During this process, the sensor
keeps stationary and the valve is open to the atmosphere.

CAUTION:
 Before IBP measurements, it should make sure all IBP sensors are zeroed
properly.
 Before IBP measurement, it makes sure no air bubbles in the IBP sensor which
result in erroneous pressure readings.
 When intracranial pressure (ICP) measurements put on a sitting patient, the

13-2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

sensor should be in line with the top of the patient's ear. Incorrect position can
result in erroneous pressure readings.

13.3.2. IBP sensor Zero

To obtain accurate pressure readings, the monitor requires a valid zero point. Zeroing
the sensor at the hospital's specified frequency, and zeroing must be performed in the
following cases:
 Every time reconnecting IBP sensor and IBP sensor cable.
 The monitor needs restart.
 Suspecting the monitor's pressure reading is inaccurate.
 When the monitor displays the message 【Zero Required】, Please refer to the
following steps to calibrating zero:
1. Connecting IBP sensor, sensor cable and module.
2. Closing the 3-way stopcock (nearby the sensor end) to the patient's valve,
and let the sensor pass through the 3-way stopcock to the atmosphere.
3. Zeroing the sensor using one way from the following methods:
 Select the parameter area of the pressure (e.g. ART) and select the
【Zero】button.
 Click 【Zero】 quick key→select 【IBP zero】 submenu→select
the pressure to zeroing.
4. After successful zero, close the valve to the atmosphere and open the
valve to the patient. During zero process, when pressure fluctuation or
the pressure exceeds the zero pressure range, it may fail. If fails, the
processing method as follows:
 Check valve position of the 3-way stopcock near the sensor end
for ensure access to the atmosphere.
 Perform zero against. Do not shake the IBP sensor and tubing
during zero calibration.

13.4. IBP Display

IBP measurements display the waveforms of pressure and pressure values on the

13-3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

screen. For arterial pressure, IBP parameter area displays systolic pressure, diastolic
pressure and mean pressure. For venous pressure, the IBP numeric area displays only the
mean pressure. The figure below shows the waveform and numerics for the Art pressure.
 Waveform display
1 2 3

 Parameter Display

5 6

7
11
8

10 9
(1) IBP label
(2) Waveform scale
(3) Waveform
(4) Pressure unit: mmHg, kPa or cmH2O
(5) Systolic pressure
(6) Diastolic pressure
(7) Diastolic pressure alarm limit
(8) Mean pressure alarm limit
(9) Mean pressure
(10) PPV measurement value
(11) Systolic pressure alarm limit

13-4
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

13.5. Setting IBP

13.5.1. Setting the IBP alarm

You can set the alarm by following the steps below:

1. Select the IBP parameter area or waveform area to enter the IBP menu.
2. Select【Alarm】 submenu.
If the alarm setting is protected by password, enter the password. For detail,
please refer to 7.6.2 Changing Alarm Setup Protection Mode.
3. Set alarms as needed.

13.5.2. Change the pressure label

The pressure label is identifier for each type only, so the pressure label must be set up
when making pressure measurements. You can choose a pressure label following these
steps:
1. Selecting IBP parameter area or waveform area where you need to change
labels for enter corresponding IBP menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Select 【Label】 where the appropriate tag name in the list.
Label name Description Label name Description

PA Pulmonary artery pressure CVP Central venous pressure

Ao Aortic pressure LAP Left atrial pressure

UAP Umbilical arterial pressure RAP Right atrial pressure

BAP Brachial arterial pressure ICP Intracranial pressure

FAP Femoral arterial pressure UVP Umbilical venous pressure

ART Arterial blood pressure LV Left ventricular pressure

PAWP Pulmonary wedge pressure P1 to P2 Non-specific pressure label

NOTE:

 The same label name cannot be used for different channels about IBP

13-5
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

13.5.3. Setting up display types about Extended Pressure

If current pressure label is set to the extended pressure (P1 or P2), you could select
the type which displays in the parameter area, following these steps:
1. Select the parameter area or waveform area about the extended pressure for
entering the corresponding pressure menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Set【Measurement】:
 All: Corresponding pressure in the parameter area shows all the pressure:
systolic pressure, diastolic pressure and mean pressure.
 Mean only: Corresponding pressure in the parameter area only shows
the average pressure.
 Auto: The system will automatically shows the pressure is displayed in
the parameter area or only the average pressure according to the
measured value of the extended pressure.

13.5.4. Setting the pressure sensitivity

The blood pressure value displayed on the monitor is average calculation about the
collected data over a period time. The higher the sensitivity, the faster the monitor
responds when the patient's blood pressure value changes, but the measurement accuracy
is lower. Inversely, the lower the sensitivity, the slower the response of the monitor when
the patient's blood pressure value changes, but the measurement accuracy is higher. When
monitoring critically ill patients, setting up a higher sensitivity is useful for timely
analysis.
You can set up the sensitivity of the current pressure, following these steps:
1. Select the IBP parameter area or waveform area for enter the corresponding
pressure menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Set【Sensitivity】.

13.5.5. Setting the IBP Waveform

You could set up the IBP waveform, following these steps:

13-6
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

1. Select the IBP parameter area or waveform area to enter the corresponding
pressure menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Make the following settings for the IBP waveform:
 Set【Speed】.
 Set 【Scale Type】: If 【Auto】 is selected, the upper and lower scales
of the IBP waveform will be automatically adjusted as the waveform
amplitude changes.

13.5.6. Turn on PPV measurement

PPV is the pulse pressure variation. When measuring arterial pressure (excluding PA),
you can turn on PPV measurements, following these steps:
1. Select the IBP parameter area or waveform area to enter the corresponding
pressure menu.
2. Select【PPV】submenu.
3. Set【PPV Measurement】 to 【ON】.
When 【PPV Measurement】 is setting to 【ON】, the source of the PPV can
be selected.

WARNING:
 The monitor will calculate the PPV based on any arterial pressure value
between heartbeats. The conditions of PPV measurement, and whether the
PPV numerical calculation has clinical significance or not, it is applicable or
not. It must be judged by a doctor.
 Only a doctor can determine the clinical value of PPV information. According
to recent scientific literature, the clinical relevance of PPV information is
limited to controlled mechanical ventilation and to sedated patients without
arrhythmias.
 The calculated PPV value may not be accurate under the following conditions:
a) Respiration rate is less than 8 rpm
b) During venting, the tidal volume is less than 8ml/kg

13-7
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

c) The patient has acute right ventricular dysfunction (i.e., pulmonary heart
disease)

13.5.7. Changing the pressure unit:

You can change the unit of pressure by following these steps:

1. Select the IBP parameter area or waveform area to enter the corresponding
pressure menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Set IBP 【Unit】 if needed.

13.5.8. Overlapping IBP Waveforms

Please following steps below, set up the IBP waveform overlay display:
1. Enter the 【Screen Layout】page, following method：
 Select 【Screen Layout】 quick key → select 【Screen Layout】
submenu.
 Select 【Main Menu】 quick key → select 【Screen Layout】 from
the 【Display】 column.
2. Select 【IBP Overlap】 in the waveform parameter area and select the IBP
waveform to be overlapped on the same line on the left side.
3. Repeat the operation of step 2 at other locations with waveform parameter
areas if needed.
4. Select to exit Setup page. The overlapped IBP waveform can be displayed
on the main interface.

You can open the 【IBP Overlap】 menu by selecting the IBP waveform area to be
overlapped on the main screen. In the 【IBP Overlap】 menu, you can make the
following settings:
 Scale

13-8
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

 Set the 【Left Scale】 for arterial pressure.

 Set the 【Right Scale】 for venous pressure.
 Set the 【Grid】 of the overlapped waveform area.
 Set the 【Wave Speed】 of the overlapped display waveform.

13.6. IBP troubleshooting

This section describes problems you may encounter during using. You can refer to
the following table for troubleshooting. If the problem persists, please contact
maintenance staff.

NOTE: See D Alarm Information for physiological alarms and technical

alarm information.

Problem Solution
IBP parameter area and waveform 1. Check whether the display of IBP
area cannot be found on the parameters is set in the 【Screen Layout】
interface menu or not. For details, see 3.6.1 Setting
Parameters to be protected.
2. Check whether the IBP parameter switch is
turned on or not. For details, see 3.6.1 Setting
Parameters
3. Check the IBP cable, IBP sensor and
module are connected or not.
4. Check the valve position of the 3-way
stopcock is correct or not.
5. Confirm that the sensor has been zeroed.
For details, see 13.3.2 IBP Sensor zero.
P1/P2 does not display systolic and Set the displayed pressure to【All】. For details,
diastolic pressure measurements see 13.5.3 Setting up display types about
Extended Pressure.

13-9
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Problem Solution
IBP reading is unstable 1. Verify no air bubbles in the IBP sensor
system.
2. Check if the sensor is fixed.
3. Perform zero against.
4. Replace the sensor.
Zero failure 1. Check if the pipeline of the IBP sensor is
open to the atmosphere.
2. Perform zero against. Do not shake the IBP
sensor and tubing during zeroing. For details,
see 13.3.2 IBP Sensor zero.
3. If zero still fails, replace the sensor.

13-10
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Chapter 14 Cardiac output (C.O.)

14.1. Introduction

C.O. (cardiac output) measurements were performed using right atrial thermodilution
to measure cardiac output and other hemodynamic parameters. The method is injecting a
cold solution into the blood circulation system and measure the blood temperature drop
caused by the cold solution at a location downstream. In the C.O. measurement window,
the temperature change is shown as a curve. The area under the curve is inversely
proportional to the C.O. value, and the monitor calculates the C.O. value based on the
curve. Since cardiac output is a continuously varying amount, multiple measurements
must be taken to obtain a reliable C.O. average. The monitor can retain 5 results, and user
can select the desired measurement to perform the average calculation.

14.2. Safety Information

WARNING:
 C.O. measurements may be inaccurate when electrosurgical is performed.
 All invasive measurements bring about risks for the patient. Sterile techniques
should be used in the measurements and follow manufacturer's instructions.
 Please use the accessories specified in this manual. When using, avoid contact
with the conductive metal body.

14.3. C.O. Measurement Limitation

Factors which can affect the accuracy of C.O. measurement, as following:

 Injection temperature
 Volume of injection
 Baseline of blood temperature of paralyzed patients
 Inhalation/exhalation cycle
 The proximity of the floating catheter to the lungs
 Floating catheter itself

14-1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

 Heart rate and hemodynamic status of paralyzed patients

 In the C.O. measurement process, any solution is quickly injected
intravenously for obtaining an accurate C.O. value. It is recommended that:
 The temperature of the sputum injection must be at least 10 C°, lower
than the temperature of the patient's blood.
 Inject the solution at the end of the expiration.
 Inject the solution quickly and smoothly.
 Each injection is completed in 4 to 5 seconds.

14.4. C.O. Display

C.O. Measurement shows no waveform on the main interface, only the values of C.O.,
C.I. (cardiac displacement index) and TB (blood temperature) are displayed in the
parameter area.
4

1
2 5

3 6

(1) C.O. label

(2) C.O. unit
(3) C.O. measurement value
(4) Time at which the C.O. average is calculated
(5) Cardiac index
(6) Blood temperature
(7) TB alarm limit

14-2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

14.5. C.O. Equipment Connecting

14.6. C.O. Measurement

14.6.1. Preparation of C.O. Measurement

1. Connecting the C.O. cable to the C.O. module or the thermistor interface
sensor port, and confirming that the C.O. measurement area is displayed on the
monitor.
2. Prepare the C.O. measurement for patients according to regulations and
procedures of the hospital department.
3. Connecting the floating catheter and other C.O. measuring accessories in
accordance with the manufacturer's manual.
4. Check that the attached accessories are functioning properly.

NOTE: For an out-line probe setup, make sure that the out-line sensor is

securely connected to the tubing.

14.6.2. Setting the C.O. Measurement

Before performing C.O. measurement, please following steps for set it up:

14-3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

1. Selecting C.O. parameters area for enter the 【C.O.】 menu.

2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Make the following settings:
 Set up patient information: Enter the patient's【Height】and【Weight】,
which are used for calculate the C.I. value.
 Set 【Catheter Const】: The C.O. coefficient is a calculation coefficient
related to the floating catheter, liquid temperature measurement method
(outflow method or ice bath method), injection volume and injection
temperature. Please refer to the floating catheter manual. When replacing
a floating conduit, its coefficient should be adjusted according to
manufacturer's instructions.
 Set 【Measure Mode】. If set 【Continuous】, the monitor automatically
performs measurement when blood temperature is stable. You do not
need to select the 【Start】 button on the C.O. measurement interface
before C.O. measurement; when setting up 【Single】, the monitor is on,
each measurement is performed after the 【Start】 button is selected.
 Set 【TI Source】. When set 【Auto】, the system will automatically
measure the temperature of the injection. Meanwhile, the 【TI Value】
option is not available; when setting up 【Manual】, you need to
manually enter the temperature of the injection at 【TI Value】.

14.6.3. Measure C.O.

Following steps for make C.O. measurement:

1. Selecting C.O. parameters area for enter the 【C.O.】 menu.
2. Click the 【C.O. Measuring】 button at the bottom of the C.O. setup menu.

14-4
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

2
5
3

(1) Current measured C.O. curve

(2) Prompt information area
(3) History measurement window
(4) Function button
(5) Average of C.O. and C.I. measured multiple times

3. Follow steps for make a C.O. measurement:

 When 【Measure Mode】 is setting to 【Single】, when the prompt
information area displays 【Ready for new measure】, you can select
the 【Start】 button and immediately perform a rapid liquid injection.
The C.O. measurement window will be show the hot dilution curve
immediately. After each measurement, its measurement results will be
displayed in the historical measurement window. It takes a certain
amount of time to repeat this step and start the next measurement.
 When the 【Measurement Mode】 setting up 【Continuous】, the C.O.
measurement can be performed continuously. When you see the
message 【Injection now】 on the C.O. measurement interface, you can
start the measurement by injecting ice water.
4. Obtaining the average value of C.O. and C.I. After completing multiple
measurements, select multiple measurement curves if needed in the historical
measurement window, and then select the 【Averaging】 button. The system

14-5
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

will calculate and display the average values of C.O. and C.I., and the average
will be stored and displayed in parameter area.
At the time of injection, the 3-way stopcock opens to the floating catheter end and
closes to the injection end. At the end of the measurement, close the end to the floating
catheter, open to the end of the injection, and then inhale the injection into the syringe.
In addition, in the C.O. measurement window, you can also choose:
 【Stop】: Press this button during measurement to cancel this measurement.
 【Setup】: Enter into the 【Setup】 page of the 【C.O.】 menu. This option
is displayed when the 【 C.O. Measuring 】 hotkey enters the C.O.
measurement window.
 【 Hemodynamics 】 : Enter the 【 Calculate 】 menu. See Chapter 19
Calculation.

NOTE:

 Starting a measurement without blood temperature being stable may cause

measurement failure.
 During the measurement of C.O., the blood temperature alarm is invalid. After
the measurement is finished, the blood temperature alarm will automatically
resume. Please refer to the instruction manual of the floating catheter to
determine the 【Catheter Const】 and the volume of the injection.

14.7. C.O. Setting

14.7.1. Setting the TB Alarm

You can set up the TB alarm by following these steps:

1. Selecting C.O. parameters area for enter the 【C.O.】 menu.
2. Select the 【Alarm】 submenu.
3. Set the alarm if needed.

14-6
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

14.7.2. Setting the temperature unit

You can change the unit of temperature, following these steps:

1. Selecting C.O. parameters area for enter the 【C.O.】 menu.
2. Select the 【Setup】 submenu.
3. Set the body temperature 【Temp Unit】.

14.7.3. Setting the C.O. Measurement Value Invalid Time

If the measured value of C.O. is not updated once more within setting time, its
measured value is displayed as a hollow number, which indicates the current measured
value has expired. You could set up the time when the C.O. measurement value expires,
following steps:
1. Select 【Main Menu】 quick key→select 【Maintenance】 from 【System】
column→input password→Enter.
2. Select 【Module】 submenu.
3. Select 【Other】 submenu.
4. Set 【C.O. Invalid Time】.

NOTE:

 When the measured value of the non-continuous measurement parameter is

displayed as a hollow number, it means that the measurement result has
expired. It is not recommended.
 Other settings, such as patient information (height, weight), catheter coefficient,
measurement mode, and injection temperature source, see 14.6.2 Setting the
C.O. Measurement.

14.8. C.O. Troubleshooting

This section describes the problems you may encounter during using. You can refer
to the following table for troubleshooting. If the problem still persists, please contact
maintenance staff.

14-7
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

NOTE: See the Appendix D Alarm Information for physiological alarms and
technical alarm information.

Problem Solution
Cannot find out 1. Check if the display of C.O. parameter is set in the
C.O. parameter area 【 Screen Layout 】 menu. For details, see 3.6.2 Setting
on the interface Display Screen.
2. Check whether the C.O. parameter switch is on or not. For
details, see 3.6.1 Setting Parameters.
3. Check whether the C.O. cable, floating catheter and liquid
temperature sensor are connected or not.
Suspected that the 1. Check whether the floating catheter position is correct or
C.O. measurement not.
is inaccurate 2. Check out whether the catheter coefficient matches the
injection temperature, volume, and temperature measurement
methods.
3. Inject the solution quickly and smoothly.
4. Complete each injection in 4 to 5 seconds.
5. Increase the volume of the injection or lower the
temperature of the injection.
6. Check the 【Setup】 page, the patient's 【Height】 and
【Weight】 settings are correct.

7. Check 【Setup】 page, when 【TI Source】 is manual,

【TI Value】 is input correctly.

C.O. Measurement 1. Increase the volume of the injection or decrease the

failure temperature of the injection. Check that the temperature of the
injection must be at least 10℃ lower than the temperature of
the patient's blood.

14-8
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Problem Solution
2. Complete the injection smoothly within 4 to 5 seconds.
3. Check whether the C.O. cable, floating catheter and liquid
temperature sensor are connected or not.

14-9
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Chapter 15 Carbon Dioxide (CO2)

15.1. Introduction

The monitor adopts infrared absorption technology to measure the carbon dioxide
(CO2) concentration in the breathing airway of patient. Because CO2 molecule can absorb
infrared light of special wavelength, and the amount of absorbed infrared light directly
relates to the concentration of CO2, therefore while the infrared light radiated from the
infrared light source passing through the gas sample containing CO2, part of energy will
be absorbed by CO2 in the gas. At another side of infrared light source, a photodetector is
used to measure the remaining infrared energy and convert it to electric signal, which will
be compared with the energy of infrared light source and adjusted so as to correctly reflect
the CO2 concentration in the gas sample.
There are two methods for measuring carbon dioxide in the patient’s airway:
1. Mainstream: Uses a CO2 sensor attached to an airway adapter directly inserted into
the patient’s breathing system.
2. Sidestream/Microflow: Takes a sample of the respiratory gas with a constant sample
flow from the patient’s airway and analyzes it with the CO2 sensor.

15.2. Safety information

WARNING:
 When placing pipes such as sampling tubes, prevent the pipes from suffocating
the patient’s throat.

CAUTION:
 When the patient is being treated with aerosolized drugs, the measured EtCO2
value may be inaccurate and is not recommended for use in this situation.
 The EtCO2 value measured by the CO2 module may differ from the CO2
partial pressure value measured by blood gas analysis.
 The CO2 module has an automatic alarm suppression function, and the CO2
15-1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

module performs a physiological alarm only after the respiratory wave is

detected. When monitoring the patient with the CO2 module, make sure the
device is properly connected to the patient.

15.3. CO2 Measurement Limitations

The following factors may affect the accuracy of the measurement:

 Leaks or internal venting of sampled gas;
 Mechanical shock;
 Cyclical pressure of up to 10kPa (100cmH2O) and abnormal pressure change
of the gas path;
 Other sources of interference (if any).
Measurement accuracy of the sidestream/microflow CO2 module may be affected by
the breath rate and inspiration/ expiration (I/E) ratio as follows:
 EtCO2 value is within specification for breath rate≤60rpm and I/E ratio≤ 1:1.
 EtCO2 value is within specification for breath rate≤30rpm and I/E ratio≤ 2:1.

15.4. Monitoring Procedure

15.4.1. Mainstream CO2 Module

1. Attaching the CO2 sensor cable

Plug the cable of CO2 sensor into CO2 connector on the monitor.
2. Selecting a proper airway adapter
Select an airway adapter based on the patient's size, ET tube diameter and
monitoring situation. For more information refer to the following table or contact
manufacturer.
Airway Adapter Type ET Tube Diameter
Big animal (Disposable) ＞4.0mm
Big animal (Reusable) ＞4.0mm
Small animal (Disposable) ≤4.0mm
Small animal (Reusable) ≤4.0mm
3. Attaching the airway adapter to the CO2 sensor

15-2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Before attaching the airway adapter to the CO2 sensor, verify that the airway
adapter windows are clean and dry. Clean or replace the adapter if necessary.
Follow these steps:
1) Align the arrow on the bottom of the airway adapter with the arrow on
the bottom of the sensor.
2) Press the sensor and airway adapter together until they click.
3) Wait for the airway adapter and sensor to warm up.
The monitor will display the “Sensor Warm Up…” message for approximately
1 minute while the sensor and adapter warm to operating temperature. The message
disappears when the sensor is ready for use.
Since the Masimo IRMA CO2 mainstream module has a faster heating rate,
there is no “Sensor Warm Up…” prompt.

CAUTION:
 The atmospheric pressure must be set to the correct value before using the
mainstream CO2 module. Incorrect atmospheric pressure settings can result in
erroneous CO2 readings (Masimo IRMA CO2 mainstream modules do not
function because they already have automatic atmospheric pressure
compensation).
 Install the sensor above the adapter to avoid liquid build-up on the adapter
window. Gas concentration at high concentrations at this location can hinder
gas analysis.
 To avoid dead space, place the sensor and adapter as close as possible to the
patient.

4. Perform a zero, the details refer to 15.8 Zeroing.

5. After the zero is finished, take the Masimo IRMA CO2 module as an example
and connect the air circuit as shown below.

15-3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

CO2
sensor

Airway adapter To patient Ventilator Wye

6. Check before use:

① Before connecting the airway adapter to the breathing circuit, check if the
readings on the monitor are correct.
② Before connecting the airway adapter to the patient circuit, verify the gas
reading and waveform through the display on the monitor.
③ After installing the mainstream CO2 sensor on the airway adapter, please check
the tightness of the patient circuit.
 Status indicated by LED on Masimo IRMA CO2 sensor:

LED The indicated status

Steady green light System OK
Blinking green light Zeroing in progress
Steady red light Oxygen battery error
Blinking red light Check adapter

15.4.2. Sidestream/Microflow CO2 module

1. Attaching the CO2 sensor cable

Plug the sensor cable into the CO2 connector on the monitor, and the sensor should
be properly placed.
2. Attaching the catheter, airway adapter or sampling tube
Connect the catheter, airway adapter or sampling tube to the sensor as required. Take
Nomoline ISA CO2 module as an example, as shown in the following figure:

15-4
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Exhaust pipe Sampling tube

connection

Sampling
CO2 sensor tube
connector

NOTE:

 Inserting the sampling tube into the sampling tube connector will automatically
start the sampling pump. After the sampling tube is pulled out, the sampling
pump stops.

3. If the sampling pump fails to turn on, or runs intermittently, perform a “Zero”
procedure. (Refer to the 15.8 Zeroing)
4. Ensure that the CO2 sensor exhaust tube vents gases away from the sensor
environment.
5. Wait for the CO2 sensor to warm up. The monitor will display the “Sensor Warm
Up...” message for approximately 1minute while the sensor warms up to operating
temperature. The message disappears when the sensor is ready for use.
6. Applying airway adapter or cannula:
1) For intubated patients requiring an airway adapter: Install the airway adapter at the
proximal end of the circuit between the elbow and the ventilator Y section. Shown
as follows:

2) For intubated patients with an integrated airway adapter in the breathing circuit:
Connect the male connector on the straight sample line to the female port on the
airway adapter. Shown as follows:

15-5
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

3) For non-intubated patients: Place the nasal cannula onto the patient. Shown as
follows:

4) For nasal or oral-nasal cannulas with oxygen delivery, place the cannula on the
patient as shown then attach the oxygen supply tubing to the oxygen delivery
system and set the prescribed oxygen flow.

CAUTION:
 Always connect the airway adapter to the sensor before inserting the airway
adapter into the breathing circuit. In reverse, always remove the airway adapter
from the breathing circuit before removing the sensor.
 Always disconnect the cannula, airway adapter or sampling tube from the CO2
sensor when not in use.
 Pull the sampling tube out of the sampling tube connector when not in use.
 Do not insert the things other than sampling tube into receptacle of sampling
tube.
 The sampling tubes are disposable. Please keep the sampling tube clean, and
prevent the tube from clogging by dust. Under the conditions that the sampling
gas temperature is 37℃, the indoor temperature is 23℃, and the sampling
relative humidity is 100%, replace the sampling tube at least every 12 hours (if
filter tip is used, it can be extended to 120 hours), or replace the sampling tube
when the sampling tube is found to be leaking, damaged or contaminated.
 When using a microflow CO2 module, the exhaust holes on the module must be
connected to the exhaust gas treatment system.

7. Pre-use inspection (pre-use inspection must be performed before connecting the

sampling tube to the patient’s breathing circuit):
① Insert the sampling tube into the air inlet on the module.

15-6
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

② Check whether the LED aperture on the module is green and always bright. (a green
light indicates that the system is normal)
③ Exhale toward the sampling tube and check whether CO2 waveform and value are
displayed on the monitor.
④ Block the sampling tube with your fingers and wait for 10s.
⑤ Check whether the blockage alarm is displayed, and whether the LED aperture on the
module flashed red at the same time.
⑥ Under appropriate circumstances, check the tightness of the patient’s breathing
circuit connected with the sampling tube.
 Status indicated by LED aperture on Nomoline ISA CO2 module:

LED aperture The indicated status

Steady green light System OK
Blinking green light Zeroing in progress
Steady red light Sensor error
Blinking red light Check sampling tube

15.5. Display

 Waveform Display

 Parameter Display
2

15-7
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

6
3
7
4

(1) CO2 waveform 5 (5) EtCO2 value

(2) Parameter label (6) Inspired minimum CO2 (FiCO2)
(3) Unit of CO2 (7) Airway respiration rate (awRR)
(4) Alarm limit of EtCO2

15.6. Settings CO2

15.6.1. Setting the CO2 Alarm

1. Select the CO2 parameter area or waveform area to enter the【CO2】menu.

2. Select【Alarm】submenu.
 If the alarm setting is protected by password, enter the password. For
detail, please refer to 7.6.2 Changing Alarm Setup Protection Mode.
3. Set alarms as needed

15.6.2. Settings Apnea Alarm Time

You can set the apnea alarm time by following the steps below. The monitor will
trigger the alarm when the patient’s suffocation time exceeds the set time.
1. Select the CO2 parameter area or waveform area to enter the【CO2】menu.
2. Select【Alarm】submenu.
3. Set【Apnea Delay】.

WARNING:
 It is cannot judge the cause of respiratory apnea through CO2 monitoring. If the
monitor cannot detect the patient's breath again from the moment of the last
breath to the preset time, the monitor only provides the alarm of respiratory
apnea. Therefore, the alarm of respiratory apnea should not be used for the
diagnosis of the patient.

15-8
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

15.6.3. Changing the CO2 Unit

To change the CO2 unit, follow this procedure:

1. Select the CO2 parameter area or waveform area to enter the【CO2】menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Set CO2【Unit】.

15.6.4. Setting the CO2 Waveform

To set the CO2 waveform, follow this procedure:

1. Select the CO2 parameter area or waveform area to enter the【CO2】menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Set CO2 waveform【Wave Mode】, 【Wave Speed】or【Scale】.

15.6.5. Setting CO2 Corrections

Temperature, water vapor in the patient’s breath, barometric pressure, and the
proportions of O2, N2O and Helium in the mixture all influence CO2 absorption.
For mainstream and sidestream/microflow CO2 module, you can set the CO2
correction by following the steps below:
1. Select the CO2 parameter area or waveform area to enter the【CO2】menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Please set the following contents according to the actual situation before
correction:
——【Gas Temperature】: Set the temperature of gas.
——【Barometric Pressure】: Set the atmospheric pressure.
The system default barometric pressure is 760mmHg, you can select【Main Menu】
quick key→from【System】column to select【Maintenance】→in【Other】submenu to
enter the barometric pressure value of the environment.
——【Zero Gas Type】: Select the gas type of zeroing, the options are【Zero On
Room Air】or【Zero On N2】.

15-9
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

——【O2 Compensation】: Select the concentration of oxygen. It can be set to a

value between 0% and 100%. The default value is 16%.
——【Anesthetic Gas】: Select the concentration of anesthetic agent. It can be set to
a value between 0.0% and 20.0%. The default value is 0.0%.
——【Balance Gas】: Select the type of balance gas, the options are 【Room Air】,
【N2O】or【Helium】.
When the most proportions of the mixture is air, select【Room Air】When the most
proportions of the mixture is N2O, select【N2O】. When the most proportions of the
mixture is Helium, select【Helium】.
The Masimo mainstream/sidestream CO2 module supports automatic air pressure
compensation and automatic temperature compensation. Manual setting is not required
under normal conditions, but other gas interferences may exist in the gas circuit. In order
to ensure accurate measurement of Masimo module, the following compensations can be
manually set according to actual conditions:
——【O2 Concentration】: Set the oxygen concentration. Can choose 0% ~ 100%,
the default value is 16%.
——【N2O Concentration】: Set the concentration of N2O. Can choose 0% ~ 100%,
the default value is 0%.

WARNING:
 Please set the CO2 corrections according to actual situation, otherwise, the
measured value may be inaccurate and away from actual value.

15.6.6. Operating mode

You can select the operating mode of the CO2 module according to the actual
situation of the module. The operation steps are as follows:
1. Select the CO2 parameter area or waveform area to enter the【CO2】menu.
2. Select【Setup】submenu.
3. Set【Operation Mode】.
 Measure: Select measurement mode is required when measuring with the CO2
module.

15-10
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

 Sleep: When not using CO2 for monitoring, it is recommended to set the CO2
module to sleep mode to increase the life of the CO2 module.

15.7. Entering Intubation Status

When performing intubation during general anesthesia, you can enter the intubation
mode in order to reduce unnecessary alarms. To enter the intubation mode, follow this
procedure:
1. Select the CO2 parameter area or waveform area to enter the【CO2】menu.
2. Select【Intubation Status】button.

For the details of the intubation mode, see 7.11 Intubation Status.

15.8. Zeroing

 Mainstream and Sidestream / Microflow CO2 Module

While zeroing is recommended the first time a CO2 sensor is connected to the monitor,
it is only absolutely necessary when the message “Zero Required” is displayed.

Follow these steps:

1. Ensure that the catheter or airway adapter is not connected to the patient or
close to any source of CO2 (including the patient's, your own exhaled breath
and ventilator exhaust valves).

2. Using any of the following methods to perform zeroing:

 Select the CO2 parameter area or waveform area, and then select【Zero】
button.
 Select 【Zero】quick key→Select【CO2 Zero】submenu→select the
CO2to zero.

The screen prompts【CO2 Zero In Progress…】, and the message disappears after the
zeroing is completed.

For Nomoline ISA CO2, the sampling tube should be pulled out for automatic zero
when needed.

15-11
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

CAUTION:
 Before zeroing, the BLT sidestream/ microflow CO2 sensor must be connected
with the sampling tube.
 Before zeroing, the mainstream CO2 sensor must be connected with the airway
adapter.
 Zeroing should not be performed for 20 seconds after the airway adapter or
cannula is separated from the patient's airway. Wait a moment before zero
correction to dissipate the remaining CO2 in the adapter or cannula.
 Zeroing should not be performed when the airway adapter or cannula is
connected to the patient's trachea.
 When the temperature is not stable, please do not adjust to zero.
 When CO2 remains in the airway adapter or casing, zeroing will result in
inaccurate measurement or other error conditions. The time required for zeroing
will also increase.
 When zeroing, do not rely on gas readings.
 Nomoline ISA CO2 module does not require user to manually zeroing, and the
user cannot successfully send the zeroing command to the module. When
necessary, the sampling tube should be pulled out for automatic zero.

15.9. Calibration

The monitor has already been calibrated before leaving factory. User can directly
apply it measuring in normal conditions (except for the following three cases). When the
following three conditions occur, please return the CO2 module to the factory for
calibration.
 After the CO2 module is used for half a year and one year;
 Clinicians doubt the accuracy of readings;

 After the latest calibration, atmospheric pressure or height above sea level
varies evidently.

15-12
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

15.10. Exhaust Emission

WARNING:
 When using the sidestream/microflow CO2 measurement on patients who are
receiving or have recently received anesthetics, connect the outlet to a scavenging
system, or to the anesthesia machine/ventilator, to avoid exposing medical staff to
anesthetics.

Use an exhaust tube to remove the sample gas to a scavenging system. Attach it to the
outlet connector of sensor.

15.11. Announcements

WARNING:
 Do not position the sensor cables or tubing in any manner that may cause
entanglement or strangulation.
 Reuse, disassembly, cleaning, disinfecting or sterilizing the single patient use
cannula kits and on-airway adapters may compromise functionality and system
performance leading to a user or patient hazard. Performance is not guaranteed
if an item labeled as single patient use is reused.
 Before using, please check whether the airway adapter is damaged. Do not use if
damage is found.
 If excessive secretions are found on the airway adapter, replace them
immediately.
 When monitoring CO2 waveform, if changes or abnormal phenomena are found,
please check the airway adapter or sampling tube. If necessary, please replace it
immediately.
 Note whether the baseline of CO2 waveform is too high. Sensor or patient
problems will cause the baseline to be too high.
 Regularly check CO2 sensor and pipeline for excessive moisture or secretion
accumulation.
 Do not operate the CO2 module when it is wet or has exterior condensation.
 Do not use microflow CO2 sensors for patients who cannot tolerate the

15-13
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

withdrawal of 50 mL/min±10 mL/min from the airway or patients that cannot

tolerate the added dead space to the airway.
 Do not connect the exhaust tube of sidestream/microflow CO2 module to the
ventilator circuit.

CAUTION:
 Use only accessories provided by manufacturer.
 Do not sterilize or immerse the CO2 sensor in liquids.
 Clean the CO2 sensor and accessories as directed in this manual.
 Do not apply excessive tension to the CO2 sensor cable.
 When aerosol drugs are present, please keep the airway adapter away from the
breathing circuit. The viscous substance of the aerosol drug can pollute the
window of the airway adapter, and the airway adapter needs to be cleaned or
replaced in advance.
 For further information on the use of Masimo IRMA CO2 mainstream module
and Nomoline ISA CO2 module, please refer to the user’s manual included with
the module.

NOTE:

 This product and its accessories are latex free.

 After the life cycles of the CO2 module and its accessories have been met,
disposal should be accomplished following national and local requirements.
 Nitrous oxide, elevated levels of oxygen and helium can influence the CO2
measurement. Please setup gas compensation according to actual state.
 Barometric pressure compensation is required to meet the stated accuracy of
the CO2 module.
 Do not place the airway adapter between the ET tube and the elbow, as this may
allow patient secretions to block the adapter windows.
 Position the airway adapter with its windows in a vertical and not a horizontal
position, this helps keep patient secretions from pooling on the windows.

15-14
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

15.12. CO2 Troubleshooting

This chapter describes the problems that may be encountered during the use of the
monitor. You can first refer to the following table to eliminate them. If the problem
persists, please contact the maintenance personnel.

CAUTION:
 For the physiological and technical alarm messages, see D Alarm Message.

15.12.1. The Sidestream/Microflow CO2 module Troubleshooting

Problem Solution

EtCO2 measurement value 1. Judge whether the CO2 concentration in the use
too low environment is too high. If the environmental
concentration is too high, the measured value is too
low. If it is more serious, zero will fail. Please pay
attention to the ventilation of the environment at
this time.
2. Check the sampling tube and connectors for leakage.
3. Check the patient status.

15.12.2. The Mainstream CO2 Module Troubleshooting

Problem Solution

Elevated baseline 1. Check the patient status.

2. Check the sensor.

15-15
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Chapter 16 Drip Monitor (DM)

16.1. Introduction

DM (Drip Monitor) module uses photoelectric non-contact principle to detect the

dropping of medical drops in the infusion tube set, trigger the circuit to work, count the
dropping frequency of medicine drops, and thus obtains the drip rate of infusion drops.
After the completion of infusion is detected, the infusion pipeline is clamped, the infusion
is blocked and a signal is sent to the monitor, and the monitor generates an infusion
completion alarm message according to the signal to prompt medical personnel to change
the liquid medicine or perform needle pulling operation.

CAUTION:
 DM only measures the number of drops in the set infusion tube assembly and
does not participate in drop control.

16.2. Safety information

WARNING:
 During measurement, the liquid level in the drip chamber should be kept below
the liquid level indicator line of the infusion monitoring module.
 Please make sure that the outside of the drip chamber is not sticky with water,
otherwise the dripping rate measurement may be inaccurate.
 The operator should pay attention to the length of the infusion tube and use the
extension tube when necessary to avoid accidents caused by pulling infusion tube
due to the patients turning over.
 The Drip monitor (DM) measurement function isn’t intended to measure the
drips rate in the infusion process of analgesic, chemotherapy medicine and
insulinum.

16-1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

CAUTION:
 In order to ensure the accuracy of dripping rate measurement, the drip monitor
module should be vertically installed or naturally hung on the infusion stand
using matching bracket.
 This function is an assistive technology implementation method designed for the
high-quality infusion nursing services, and cannot replace manual monitoring
and speed control operations during infusion.
 This function is suitable for working under relatively static conditions.
Therefore, avoid using it in a moving state, and avoid shaking and tilting at a
large angle. When the water mist and small water drops in the dropper are
seriously hung on the wall, it may interfere with the detection. If necessary, you
can flick the wall of the dropper with your finger to shake off the small wate
drops.
 The DM module uses infrared sensing to detect, so it should be avoided in strong
light environment.

16.3. DM measurement

16.3.1. Start infusion

16.3.1.1. Connect DM module cable

Insert the DM module cable into the DM socket on the monitor, and the drip monitor
interface will be displayed on the monitor.

16.3.1.2. Pre-perfusion infusion tube

Close the flow clamp tightly and connect the infusion tube set with the infusion
container, then squeeze the drip chamber and pour the liquid medicine to the 1/2 position
of the drip chamber. Open the flow clamp, fill the liquid medicine to the tip needle, and
then close the flow clamp tightly.

16-2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

16.3.1.3. Install infusion tube set into DM module

Push the drip chamber into the slot of the drip chamber of the DM module, and clamp
the pipeline which is connected to the lower part of the drip chamber into the clamping
groove of DM module, as shown in the figure. The DM module is fixed to a suitable
position by means of supporting brackets or hanging ropes. Then, exhaust the pipeline to
ensure that the gas in the pipe set is exhausted and close the flow clamp tightly.

5
1
3
4
2

(1) The slot of the drip chamber

(2) Liquid stop clamp
(3) Start/Stop DM button
(4) Liquid stop clamp reset button
(5) Liquid level indicator line of DM module

WARNING:
 Ventilating operation can only be performed when the infusion is not performed
and the infusion tube is not connected to the patient.

16.3.1.4. Configure related parameters

If the unit of mL/h needs to be adopted, can switch “Drops/min” to “mL/h” in the
menu of the monitor and set the conversion parameter between the number of drops and
mL.

CAUTION:
 The drip rate corresponding to the 1 mL infusion volume must be entered

16-3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

according to the relevant statement of the infusion set used. For example, the
Double-Dove tube declares that 20 drops of distilled water are equivalent to 1
mL±0.1 mL, so enter: 20 in the Drops/mL parameter setup.

16.3.1.5. Start DM measurement and adjust drip rate

Connect the infusion tube to the patient, start drip monitor (DM) measurement
through the“Start/Stop” button on the DM module, and adjust to the desired drip rate via
the flow clamp. The DM module indicator light switches from yellow to green and blinks
synchronously with the dropping of liquid drops.

16.3.2. Stop infusion

During the infusion or after the infusion is completed, press the “Start/Stop” button
of the DM module, and the indicator light of the module will switch to a yellow state. At
this time, the monitor will exit the DM function and will no longer perform drip monitor
measurement.

WARNING:
 In the non-infusion drip monitor state, when infusion is completed, the monitor
will not stop the infusion and send out an infusion completion alarm. Just quit
DM function, but the infusion is still continuing. If the infusion needs to be
stopped, the liquid stop clamp of the tube set needs to be operated to stop the
infusion.

16.3.3. Infusion completion

When infusion is completed, the indicator light of DM module is switched to red

flashing state, the liquid stop clamp is automatically closed, block the pipeline, stop
infusion, and the monitor generates infusion completion alarm.
After recognizing the alarm, the medical staff confirms the alarm, separates the
infusion tube from the patient, presses the “Reset” button on the DM module, opens the
liquid stop clamp, takes out the infusion tube set, and finishes a drip monitor.

16-4
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

If you need to replace the liquid medicine container, please follow the steps as
below:
1) When the liquid stop clamp of the DM module is closed, remove the liquid
medicine container from the infusion pipeline;
2) Connect the infusion pipeline with a new liquid medicine container;
3) Open the liquid stop clamp through the “Reset” button on the DM module,
and then press the “Start/Stop” button to continue drip monitoring.

16.4. DM module indicator

Status Indicator
Drip monitoring The green light is always on and flickers with
drops of liquid.
Suspension or stop of infusion Yellow is always bright.
Infusion completed and stopped Red light flashing (2Hz)

16.5. DM display
2

1
6

4 5
(1) Parameter Label
(2) Drip rate unit (main unit)
(3) The value of drip rate
(4) The value of flow rate
(5) Flow rate unit
(6) Working state diagram
The green dot blinks during drip monitoring, and when when drip monitor is
stopped, the yellow dot light without flashing; when the infusion is completed, the whole
symbol light white and red alternately.

16-5
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

16.6. Setting DM

16.6.1. Setting main unit

You can set the display of the DM main unit by the following steps as below:
1. Select the DM parameter area to enter 【DM】 menu.
2. Set 【Unit】of DM. The selected unit is displayed in the DM parameter area in
the form of a main unit.

16.6.2. Setting unit conversion parameters

In order to ensure the accuracy of the flow rate, you need to set the conversion
parameter between the number of drops and mL. The steps are as below:
1. Select the DM parameter area to enter 【DM】 menu.
2. Set 【Drop Per Milliliter】 of DM. The default value is 20.

16.7. DM check

The DM module has already been verified before leaving factory. Generally, the user
can directly measure it. Please contact the manufacturer or maintenance personnel
authorized by the hospital to repair the DM module when the following two situations
occur:
——The maintenance test is unqualified;
——Clinicians doubt the accuracy of readings.

16-6
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Chapter 17 Review
17.1. Review Overview

You can know how the patient's condition is developing through reviewing interface
to check the trend data, events, waveforms, and so on. You can also view the trend data
through the OxyCRG screen to know the changes in the patient’s condition.

CAUTION：
 Changing the date and time will affect the storage of trends and events and may
result in data loss.

17.2. Reviewing Page

The review page contains graphic trends and tabular. The review page where each
submenu is located displays patient trend data in different forms.

17.2.1. Accessing the Review Page

Choose one of the following methods to enter the review page

 Select 【Review】 quick key.
 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from the 【Review】 column select the
desired option.

17.2.2. The structure of review page

The review pages have similar structure. We take the graphic trends review page as
an example. These contents will not be introduced in each review page.

17-1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

1
2 5

3 7

9
(1) Event type indicator: Different color blocks match different types of events.
• Red: high priority alarm event
• Yellow: medium priority alarm event
• Cyan: low priority alarm event
(2) Current window time line: indicates the time length of the current window.
(3) Waveform area: display trend curves. The color of trend curves is consistent with
the color of parameter labels.
(4) Time line:
 can be moved within this time length.
 Different color blocks at the time line indicate alarm events of different
types. The color of the color block is consistent with the color of the
event identifier.
(5) Cursor time
(6) Cursor
(7) Waveform area: displays the parameter value at the cursor time.
(8) Button area
(9) Slider: indicates the position of current window time in the entire time length.
Dragging this button left or right enables you to locate the trend data at a specific
time and also refreshes trend data in current window accordingly.

17-2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

17.2.3. Symbols on Review Pages

The following table lists the symbols on review pages.

Symbol Description
Slider: indicates the position of current window time in the entire time length.
Dragging this button left or right enables you to locate the trend data at a
specific time and also refreshes trend data in current window accordingly.

or Goes to the previous or next event.

Event list: displays events in a chronological order. The most recent event is
displayed at the top. The number of asterisk symbols (*) before an event an
event matches alarm priority.

17.2.4. Common Operations of Review Page

This section describes common operations for all review pages.

17.2.4.1. Browsing Trend Data

In review page, the user can browse trend data in one of the following ways:
 Move the slider .
 Move the cursor.
 Slide page.

17.2.4.2. Viewing events

View the events in one of the following ways:

 Select to open the event list. You can select the event you want to view

from the event list.

 Select or to view the previous or next events. In event list, events

are displayed in a chronological order. The most recent event is displayed at
the top. The number of asterisk symbols (*) before an event an event matches
alarm priority as follow:
 ***: high priority alarm
 **: medium priority alarm
 *: low priority alarm

17-3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

17.2.5. Tabular Trends Review Page

The trend table review page displays how the patient's physiological parameter trend
is developing in a tabular manner.

17.2.5.1. Entering the Tabular Trends Review Page

Choose one of the following methods to enter the tabular trends review page:
 Select【Review】quick key→Select【Trend Table】submenu.
 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Review】column to select【Tabular
Trends】.

17.2.5.2. Selecting the Trend Group

The method for selecting trend groups is as follows:

1. Choose one of the following methods to enter the tabular trends review page:
 Select【Review】quick key→Select【Tabular Table】submenu.
 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Review】column to select
【Tabular Trends】.
2. Select【Trend Group】button→Select【Select Trend Group】submenu.
3. Select the displayed parameter combination as required.

17.2.5.3. Editing the Trend Group

The trend group defines the trend data displayed on the tabular trends review page. If
you have selected a 【Trend Group】 other than 【All】 and 【Standard】, you can
edit the trend group. To do so, follow this procedure:
1. Enter the tabular trends review page by either of the following ways:
 Select【Review】quick key→Select【Trend Table】submenu.
 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Review】column to select
【Tabular Trends】.
2. Select【Trend Group】 button.
3. Select the trend group submenu to edit.
 Add parameters: select desired parameters from the 【Choices】 column

17-4
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

on the left and select 【Add】.

 Delete parameters: select desired parameter from the 【Selected】
column on the right and then select 【Delete】.
 Move the position of parameters: select desired parameters from the
【Selected】 column on the right and select 【Move Up】, 【Move
Down】, 【Move To Top】 or 【Move To Bottom】.
Selecting 【Default Config】 will resume the trend group setting to factory defaults.

CAUTION:
 When 【Trend Group】 is set to 【All】 or 【Standard】, you cannot edit the
trend group.
 ECG parameter and waveform are always displayed in the first row on the
trend page. It cannot be deleted or moved.

17.2.5.4. Changing the Resolution of Trend Data

The resolution of tabular trends defines the interval of displaying trend data. High
resolution is especially suited for the fast-changing clinical situation. If the patient’s
status changes more gradually, a low resolution will be more informative.
To change resolution, follow this procedure:
1. Enter the tabular trends review page.
2. Select 【…】 to enter setup menu.
3. Select 【Sample Rate】.
 【5s or 30s】：The trend of parameters in the last 6 hours was observed
at intervals of 5 seconds or 30 seconds.
 【1 min、5 min、10min、15min、30min、1h、2h、3 h】：According
to the selected time interval, observe the parameter trend of the last 180
hours.
 【NIBP】： The tabular trends show the values of each parameter at the
measurement time of NIBP parameters.

17-5
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

 【C.O.】：The tabular trends show the values of each parameter at the

measurement time of C.O. parameters.

17.2.6. Graphics Trends Review Page

The graphic trends review page displays trend data in a graphic form.

17.2.6.1. Entering the Graphic Trends Review Page

Choose one of the following methods to enter the graphic trends review page:
 Select【Review】quick key→Select【Trend Graph】submenu.
 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Review】column to select【Graphic
Trends】.

17.2.6.2. Selecting the Trend Group

For more information, see 17.2.5.2 Selecting the Trend Group.

17.2.6.3. Editing the Trend Group

For more information, see 17.2.5.3 Editing the Trend Group.

17.2.6.4. Changing the Window Time

To set the length of time for each screen to display data as follows:
1. Enter the graphic trends review page.
2. Select 【…】 to enter setup menu.
3. Select 【Window Time】.
 【8min、30min】：Each screen displays trend data for the set time, and
you can observe the trend in the last 6 hours.
 【1h、2h、4h】：Each screen displays trend data for the set time, and you
can observe the trend in the last 180 hours.

17-6
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

17.2.6.5. Setting the Number of Waveforms

Follow these steps to select the number of waveforms to display in the graphic
trends:
1. Enter the graphic trends review page.
2. Select 【…】 to enter setup menu.
3. Select 【Wave Number】.

17.2.7. Events Review Page

The monitor stores alarm events and system events in real time. Alarm event types
include physiological alarm event. When an alarm event occurs, the monitor will store the
values of relevant parameters at the time of occurrence and the relevant waveforms for 16
seconds before and after the time of occurrence.

CAUTION:
 A sudden loss of power has no impact on the events stored.

17.2.7.1. Entering the Events Review Page

Choose one of the following methods to enter the events review page:
 Select【Review】quick key→Select【Event】submenu.
 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Review】column to select【Event】.
The event review page displays a list of events in the order in which they occurred.
The most recent event is displayed at the top. The number of asterisk symbols (*) before
an event an event matches alarm priority.
The event identifier on the left side of the alarm event displays different types of
events with different color blocks:
 Red: high priority alarm event
 Yellow: medium priority alarm event
 Cyan: low priority alarm event
The number of currently events and the total number of filtered events are displayed

17-7
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

at the top right corner of the event list. For example, 3/10 indicates that there are a total of
10 selected events, and currently there are 3 events.

17.2.7.2. Configuring the Filter

You can filter events by time, alarm priority, parameter category or event type. To
configure the filter, follow this procedure:
1. Enter events review page to switch on 【Filter】.
2. Select【Filter Setup】and set the desired filter criterion. Events after filtering
will be displayed in the event list.

CAUTION:
 If 【Filter】 is not switch on, the relevant setting in 【Filter Setup】 will not take
effect.

17.2.7.3. Viewing Event Details

To view waveforms and parameter values at the selected event time, follow this
procedure:
1. Enter the event review page.
2. Select 【Detail】.

CAUTION:
 Please ensure that the best ECG lead with largest waveform amplitude and the
highest signal-to-noise ration is selected. Choosing the best ECG lead is very
important to recognize cardiac beat, classify cardiac beat and recognize
ventricular fibrillation.

17.2.8. Full Disclosure Review Page

On the Full Disclosure review page, you can review waveform data up to 72 hours.
You can view compressed waveforms, full waveforms and numeric values.

17-8
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

17.2.8.1. Entering the Full Disclosure Review Page

Choose one of the following methods to enter the Full Disclosure review page:
 Select【Review】quick key→Select【Full Disclosure】submenu.
 Select【Main Menu】quick key→form 【Review】 column select 【Full
Disclosure】.

17.2.8.2. Selecting Compressed waveforms

To review compressed waveforms, you must first select which parameters to store
and display. Follow these steps:
1. Enter the Full Disclosure review page.
2. Select 【Setup】 submenu to enter 【Full Disclosure Setup】 page.
3. Select 【Storage】 submenu and select the desired waveforms to be stored.
4. Select 【Display (Maximum: 3)】 submenu and select the desired waveform
to be displayed from the stored waveforms.

CAUTION:
 If more waveforms are selected in the 【Storage】 column, the storage time of
these waveforms will be shortened due to the limitation of memory size. The
waveforms may not be stored for 72 hours. Please exert caution when selecting
waveforms.

When an alarm occurs, the band on the compressed waveform at the alarm time
will use different shading to indicate different alarm levels.
 Red: high priority alarm
 Yellow: med priority alarm
 Cyan: low alarm priority

17.2.8.3. Setting Gain and Duration

To set the length of time each compressed waveform is displayed and the ECG

17-9
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

waveform height. Follow these steps:

1. Enter the holographic waveform review page.
2. Select 【…】 to enter setup menu.
3. Select 【Duration】 to set the length of time for each compressed waveform
display.
4. Select 【Gain】 to set ECG waveform gain.

17.2.8.4. Viewing Details of Compressed Waveforms

To view the full waveforms and numeric values of compressed waveforms, follow
this procedure:
1. Enter the holographic waveform review page.
2. Select 【Details】. You can perform the following operations on this page:
 Select 【…】 to set 【Waveform Speed】, 【Record】 and 【Gain】.
 Select 【Overview】 to return to the compressed waveform page.

17.2.9. OxyCRG Review Page

You can review up to 48 hours’ trend curves and compressed waveforms on the
OxyCRG review page.

17.2.9.1. Entering the OxyCRG Review Page

Choose one of the following methods to enter the OxyCRG Review Page:
 Select 【Review】 button on the OxyCRG Review Page.
 Select【Review】quick key→Select【OxyCRG】submenu.
 Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→enter 【 Review 】 column →Select
【OxyCRG】.

17.2.9.2. Changing the Resolution of Trend Curves

To set the resolution of trend curves, follow this procedure:

1. Enter the OxyCRG review page.

17-10
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

2. Set 【Zoom】.

17.2.9.3. Setting the Compressed waveform

To set the compressed waveform, follow this procedure:

1. Enter the OxyCRG review page.
2. Set 【Waveform】.

17-11
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Chapter 18 Calculations
18.1. Introduction

The monitor provides calculation functions. The calculated values, which are not
directly measured, are computed based on the data and measurement values you enter.
The calculation is independent of other monitoring functions and the object of
calculation may not be the patient monitored by this monitor. The calculation operation
will not affect the patients being monitored.

The following calculations can be performed on this monitor:

 Drug calculation
 Hemodynamic calculation
 Oxygenation calculation
 Ventilation calculation
 Nephridium Calculation

18.2. Safety information

WARNING:
 The dosage of drugs must be decided by the physician in charge.
 During calculation, check that the entered values are correct and the calculated
values are appropriate. We assume no responsibility for any consequences
caused by wrong entries and improper operations.

18.3. Drug Calculation

The monitor provides the drug calculation function.

18.3.1. Calculation Step

The Drug calculation steps are as follows:

1. Access drug calculation page by either of the following ways:

18-1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

 Select【Calculations】quick key.
 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from【Calculations】column to select
【Drug】.
2. Set 【Drug Name】 and 【Patient Type】. If the selected drug is affected by
weight, switch on 【Weight Participation】 and enter the patient’s weight.
3. Enter the drug-related information such as total amount, volume and dose of
drugs.
4. Select 【Calculate】 button to calculate. Red arrow marks are displayed
before the calculation results.

CAUTION:
 If available, the patient category and weight from the patient demographics
menu are automatically entered when you first access drug calculation. You can
change the patient category and weight. This will not change the patient category
and weight stored in the patient demographic information.

18.3.2. Checking the Titration Table

The Titration Table shows informations on the currently used drugs. You can
check the dose received by the patient at different infusion rate through the Titration
Table. The procedure for viewing the titration table is as follows:
1. Access drug calculation page by either of the following ways:
 Select【Calculations】quick key.
 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from 【Calculations】 column to
select 【Drug】.
2. Select 【Titration】 sub menu.
3. Select 【Dose Type】 at the bottom of the interface to set the unit type of drug
dose in the titration table.
4. Select 【Step】 to set the interval between two adjacent titration table item.
You can choose the sorting method of titration table:
 【Dose】: The titration table is listed in the sequence of increased drug
18-2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

dose.
 【INF Rate】: The titration table is listed in the sequence of increased
infusion rate.

18.3.3. Drug calculation Formula

Description Unit Formula

g series: mcg, mg, g;

Dose Amount = Liquid Volume
Dose Amount unit series: unit, kU, MU;
×drug concentration
mEq series: mEq;
Liquid
ml Manual input required
Volume
mcg/ml, mg/ml, g/ml,
Drug Drug concentration = Dose
Unit/ml, KU/ml, MU/ml,
concentration Amount / Liquid Volume
mEq/ml
Drop Size GTT/ml Manual input required

g series：mcg, mg, g;
Dose/hr unit series: unit, kU, MU; Dose/h=Dose/min×60
mEq series: mEq;

g series：mcg, mg, g;
Dose/min unit series: unit, kU, MU; DoseMin=DoseMin
mEq series: mEq;

Dose/kg/hr g series：mcg, mg, g;

(weight unit series: unit, kU, MU; Dose/h= Dose/h/weight
based) mEq series: mEq;
Dose/kg/min g series：mcg, mg, g;
(weight unit series: unit, kU, MU; Dose/min= Dose/min /weight
based) mEq series: mEq;
Infusion rate = Dose/h/drug
INF rate ml/h
concentration

18-3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Description Unit Formula

Drip rate = infusion

Drip rate GTT/min
rate*volume per drop/60

Duration h Duration = drug amount/dose/h

18.4. Hemodynamic Calculations

The monitor provides the hemodynamic calculation function. The monitor can
save the results of up to 20 calculations, which are displayed in groups.

18.4.1. Calculation Step

To perform hemodynamic calculation, follow this procedure:

1. Access hemodynamic calculation page by either of the following ways:

 Select 【Calculations】quick key→【Hemodynamics】submenu.
 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from 【Calculations】 column to
select 【Hemodynamics】.

2. Enter the correct value for each parameter. For a patient who is being
monitored, the currently measured values are automatically taken, and the
height and weight are derived from the patient information entered.

3. Select 【Calculate】 to calculate the value of each output parameter. The

calculated value is greater than the normal upper limit is indicated by an up
arrow “↑”; the calculated value is lower than the normal lower limit is
indicated by a down arrow “↓”.
 Select 【Range】 to show the normal range of each parameter.
 Select 【Unit】 to show the unit of each parameter.

18-4
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

18.4.2. Input Parameters

Abbreviation Unit Full Name

C.O. L/min cardiac output

HR bpm heart rate

PAWP mmHg pulmonary artery wedge pressure

MAP mmHg artery mean pressure

MPAP mmHg mean pulmonary artery pressure

CVP mmHg central venous pressure

EDV mL end-diastolic volume

Height cm; inch height

Weight kg; lb weight

18.4.3. Output Parameters and calculation formula

Output
Unit Full Name Formula
Parameter
C.I. mL/min/m2 cardiac index
body surface BSA=HT0.725×WT0.425×
BSA m2
area 0.007184
SV mL stroke volume SV = 1000× C.O. /HR
2
SVI mL/m stroke index SVI= SV/BSA
systemic
5
SVR dyn*s/cm vascular
resistance
systemic
dyn*s*m2/c
SVRI vascular SVRI = SVI /BSA
m5
resistance index
pulmonary
PVR dyn*s /cm5
vascular

18-5
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Output
Unit Full Name Formula
Parameter
resistance
pulmonary
dyn*s*m2/c
PVRI vascular PVRI= PVR×BSA
m5
resistance index
LCW kg*m left cardiac work LCW= 0.0136 × APMAP × C.O.
left cardiac work
LCWI kg*m/m2 LCWI = RCW×BSA
index
left
LVSW g*m ventricularstrok LVSW = 0.0136 ×MAP×SV
e work
left ventricular
2
LVSWI g*m/m stroke work LVSWI = LVSW/BSA
index
right cardiac
RCW kg*m
work
right cardiac
RCWI kg*m/m2 RCWI= RCW/BSA
work index
right ventricular
RVSW g*m RVSW = 0.0136 × MPAP× SV
stroke work
right ventricular
2
RVSWI g*m/m stroke work R VSWI= RVSW /BSA
index
EF % ejection fraction EF= 100 × SV /EDV

18.5. Oxygenation Calculation

The monitor provides the oxygenation calculation function. The monitor can save
the results of up to 20 calculations, which are displayed in groups:

18.5.1. Calculation Step

The oxygenation calculation steps are as follows:

18-6
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

1. Access oxygenation calculation page by either of the following ways:

 Select【Calculations】quick key→【Oxygenation】submenu.
 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from 【Calculations】 column to
select 【Oxygenation】.
2. Enter the correct value for each parameter. For a patient who is being
monitored, the currently measured values are automatically taken, and the
height and weight are derived from the patient information entered.
3. Select 【Calculate】 to calculate the value of each output parameter. The
calculated value is greater than the normal upper limit is indicated by an up
arrow “↑”; the calculated value is lower than the normal lower limit is
indicated by a down arrow “↓”.
In the Oxygenation page, you can also perform the following operations:
 Select 【Oxygen Unit】, 【Hb Unit】 and 【Pressure Unit】, then
corresponding parameter values will be automatically converted and
updated accordingly.
 Select 【Range】 to show the normal range of each parameter.
 Select 【Unit】 to show the unit of each parameter.

18.5.2. Input Parameters

Input Parameter Unit Full Name

C.O. L/min cardiac output

FiO2 % percentage fraction of inspired oxygen

PaO2 mmHg, kPa partial pressure of oxygen in the arteries

PaCO2 mmHg, kPa partial pressure of carbon dioxide in the arteries

SaO2 % arterial oxygen saturation

PvO2 mmHg, kPa partial pressure of oxygen in venous blood

SvO2 % venous oxygen saturation

18-7
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Input Parameter Unit Full Name

g/L, g/dL,
Hb hemoglobin
mmol/L
mL/dL,
CaO2 arterial oxygen content
mL/L
mL/dL, venous oxygen content
CvO2
mL/L

VO2 mL/min oxygen consumption

RQ Respiratory quotient

ATMP mmHg, kPa atmospheric pressure

Height cm, inch height

Weight kg, lb weight

18.5.3. Output Parameters and calculation formula

Output
Unit Full Name Formula
Parameters
BSA=HT0.725×WT0.425×
BSA m2 body surface area
0.007184
arteriovenous
mL/L,
C(a-v)O2 oxygen content C(a-v)O2=CaO2-CvO2
mL/dL
difference
oxygen extraction
O2ER % O2ER=（CaO2－CvO2）/ CaO2
ratio
DO2 mL/min oxygen transport DO2=C.O.×CaO2
PAO2=【FiO2×(ATMP－water
partial pressure of
mmHg, pressure) 】－(PaCO2×1.25)
PAO2 oxygen in the
kPa Wherein the water pressure is
alveolar
selected to be 47mmHg (6.3kPa)

18-8
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Output
Unit Full Name Formula
Parameters
mmHg, alveolar-arterial
AaDO2 AaDO2=PAO2－PaO2
kPa oxygen difference
mL/L, capillary oxygen CcO2 = Hb ×1.34
CcO2
mL/dL content ＋0.031×PAO2
Qs/Qt= (CcO2－CaO2)/( CcO2
Qs/Qt % venousad mixture
－CvO2)

18.6. Ventilation Calculations

The monitor provides the ventilation calculation function. The monitor can save the
results of up to 20 calculations, which are displayed in groups.

18.6.1. Calculation Step

The ventilation calculation steps are as follows:

1. Access ventilation calculation page by either of the following ways:
 Select【Calculations】quick key→【Ventilation】submenu.
 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from 【Calculations】 column to
select 【Ventilation】.
2. Enter the correct value for each parameter. For a patient who is being
monitored, the currently measured values are automatically taken.
3. Select 【Calculate】 to calculate the value of each output parameter. The
calculated value is greater than the normal upper limit is indicated by an up
arrow “↑”; the calculated value is lower than the normal lower limit is
indicated by a down arrow “↓”.
On the ventilation page, you can also perform the following operations:
 Select 【Pressure Unit】, then corresponding parameter values will be
automatically converted and updated accordingly.
 Select 【Range】 to show the normal range of each parameter.
 Select 【Unit】 to show the unit of each parameter.

18-9
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

18.6.2. Input Parameter

Input Parameter Unit Full Name

FiO2 % percentage fraction of inspired oxygen

RR rpm respiration rate

PeCO2 mmHg, kPa partial pressure of mixed expiratory CO2

PaCO2 mmHg, kPa partial pressure of carbon dioxide inthearteries

PaO2 mmHg, kPa partial pressure of oxygen in the arteries

TV mL tidal volume

RQ respiratory quotient

ATMP mmHg, kPa atmospheric pressure

18.6.3. Output Parameter and calculation formula

Output
Unit Full Name Formula
Parameter

PAO2=【FiO2×(ATMP－water
partial pressure of
pressure) 】－(PaCO2×1.25)
PAO2 mmHg,kPa oxygen in the
Wherein the water pressure is
alveolar
selected to be 47mmHg (6.3kPa)

alveolar-arterial
AaDO2 mmHg,kPa AaDO2=PAO2－PaO2
oxygen difference
Pa/FiO2 mmHg,kPa oxygenation ratio Pa/FiO2= PaO2/FiO2

arterial to alveolar
a/AO2 % a/AO2= （100 ×PaO2）/PAO2
oxygen ratio
MV L/min minute volume MV=(TV/1000)×RR

18-10
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Output
Unit Full Name Formula
Parameter
volume of
Vd=【( PaCO2－PeCO2) ×TV】
Vd mL physiological dead
/PaCO2
space
physiologic dead
Vd/Vt= (PaCO2－PeCO2)/
Vd/Vt % space in percent of
PaCO2×100%
tidal volume

VA L/min alveolar volume VA=(TV－Vd) ×RR

18.7. Nephridium Calculation

The monitor provides the nephridium calculation function. The monitor can save the
results of up to 20 calculations, which are displayed in groups.

18.7.1. Calculation Step

1. Access nephridium calculation page by either of the following ways:

 Select【Calculations】quick key→【Nephridium】submenu.

 Select【Main Menu】quick key→from 【Calculations】 column to

select 【Nephridium】.

2. Enter the correct value for each parameter. For a patient who is being
monitored, the currently measured values are automatically taken, and the
height and weight are derived from the patient information entered.
3. Select 【Calculate】 to calculate the value of each output parameter. The
calculated value is greater than the normal upper limit is indicated by an up
arrow “↑”; the calculated value is lower than the normal lower limit is
indicated by a down arrow “↓”.
 Select 【Range】 to show the normal range of each parameter.
 Select 【Unit】 to show the unit of each parameter.

18-11
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

18.7.2. Input Parameter

Input Parameters Unit Full Name

URK mmol/L urine pstassium

URNa mmol/L urinary sodium

Urine mL/24h urine

Posm mOsm/kgH2O plasm osmolality

Uosm mOsm/kgH2O urineosmolality

SerNa mmol/L serumsodium

Cr umol/L creatinine

UCr umol/L urinecreatinine

BUN mmol/L blood urea nitrogen

Height cm, inch height

Weight kg, lb weight

18.7.3. Output Parameter and calculation formula

Output
Unit Full Name Formula
Parameter

urinesodium URNaEx= Urine ×

URNaEx mmol/24h
excretion URNa/1000

Cosm=Uosm×(Urine/24/60)/
Cosm mL/min osmolar clearance
Posm

urine potassium URKEx= Urine ×

URKEx mmol/24h
excretion URK/1000

18-12
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Output
Unit Full Name Formula
Parameter
free water CH20=Urine/24×(1－
CH2O mL/h
clearance Uosm/Posm)
sodium potassium
Na/K % Na/K=URNaEx/URKEx
ratio
urine to plasma
U/Posm U/Posm =Uosm/Posm
osmolality ratio
blood ureanitrogen
BUN/Cr BUN/Cr
creatinine ratio

clearance of CNa(mL/24hrs)=URNa)×Ur
CNa mL/24h
sodium ine/SerNa

creatinine clearance Clcr= Ucr × Urine / Cr /

Clcr mL/min
rate (BSA / 1.73) / 1440

urine-serum
U/Cr UCr/Cr
creatinine ratio
fractional excretion FENa%=(URNa×Cr)/(SerNa
FENa %
of sodium ×Ucr) ×100%

*：BUN/Cr is a ratio at mol unit system.

18-13
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Chapter 19 Recording
19.1. Recorder

This monitor uses the thermal recorder which supports various record types. It can
output the patient information, measurement data, review data and three waveforms at
best.
1
2
3

(1) Power indicator lamp

 ON: The recorder works correctly.
 OFF: The monitor is switched off.
(2) Trouble indicator lamp
 ON: There is something wrong with recorder, such as short of paper, door or
the recorder not fasten up and something like that.
 OFF: The recorder goes well.
(3) Paper outlet
(4) Recorder door

19.2. Recording Type

The records can be divided into the following types according to trigger modes:
1. Real-time record of manual startup;
2. The circular record of automatic strartup of the recording meter in line with
the given time interval.
3. The alarm record triggered by out-of-limit parameter and so on.
4. Record started by manual operation and related to special function.

19-1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

19.3. Starting Recordings

You can start recording by manual way through the following means:
 Press 【Real-time Record】 quick key below the monitor interface to start
real-time recording.
 Select 【Record】 button in the current window or above the menu to start the
associated record of the special function.

The recorder can start recording automatically in the following situation:

 If the periodic recording has been started, the recorder will start recording in
the set time interval. Refer to 19.6 Setting the Recorder for detailed
instructions.
 When the 【Alm Switch】 and 【Alm Output】 of a parameter are both set
to 【On】, once the parameter gives an alarm, the monitor will be triggered
to start an alarm record.

19.4. Stopping Recordings

You can stop recording by manual way through the following means:
 In the process of real-time recording, click the 【Real-time Record】 quick
key.

The recorder will stop automatically in the following situation:

 The recorder has finished its task.
 The recorder is sort of paper.
 There is something wrong with the recorder

19.5. Recording Flags

When the printing of the record report is finished, there are the following flags:
 For automatically stopped recordings: Print “***END***” at the end of the
report.
 For manually or abnormally stopped recordings: There is no flag printing at
the end of the report.

19-2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

19.6. Setting the Recorder

This section describes the definition of the main setting items. Users can refer to
these definitions to select other similar setting items in the device according to their
needs.

Select 【Main Menu】 → from 【Report】 column select 【Record Setup】to

enter according corresponding menu.

19.6.1. Selecting the recorded waveform

The recorder can output up to 3 waveforms at a time. In the 【Record Setup】menu,

you can select 【Waveform 1】, 【Waveform 2】, 【Waveform 3】 in turn, and then
select the name of the waveform in the pop-up list. Select 【Close】 to turn off the output
of 1 waveform. These settings apply to real-time recording and periodic recording.

19.6.2. Setting the duration of real-time recording

When starting a real-time recording, the length of recording depends on your setting
of recording duration.
1. Open the 【Record Setup】 menu.
2. Set 【Record Duration】 to:
 【8s】: Record the waveform of 4 seconds before and after the current
time.
 【Continue】: Record the waveform 5 seconds before and after the
current time until you manually stop recording.

19.6.3. Setting the interval for periodic recording

You can set a certain time interval, and the recorder automatically starts recording
according to the set time interval.
1. Open the 【Record Setup】 menu.
2. Set 【Cycle Record Interval】.
3. After the setting is completed, the recorder starts each recording at the set
interval.
19-3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

19.6.4. Setting the duration of period recording

You can set the duration of every period recording in the following ways:

1. Open the 【Record Setup】 menu.

2. Set 【Cycle Record Duration】 to:

 【8s】: Record the waveform of 4 seconds before and after the current
time.

19.6.5. Setting the recording speed

1. Open the 【Record Setup】 menu.

2. Set 【Record Speed】.
This setting is applicable to all recording tasks with waveforms.

19.6.6. Setting alarm recording duration

You can set how long the waveform needs to be recorded when an alarm occurs, as
follows:

1. Open the 【Record Setup】 menu.

2. Set 【Alarm Record Duration】.

 【8s】: Record the waveform of 4 seconds before and

after the alarm triggering time.

19.6.7. Setting NIBP Trigger Record

You can set to record the output NIBP measurement results when NIBP
measurement is completed, as follows:
1. Open the 【Record Setup】 menu.
2. Set 【NIBP Trigger】 to ON or OFF.

19.7. Installing Recording Paper

If the record paper runs out, please install the record paper as the following step:
1. Press both sides of the recorder door with one hand and pull outwards to open

19-4
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

the recorder door;

2. Put the recording paper into the recorder with the thermal side which is
smoother up.
3. Close the door of the recorder, and pull some recording paper outside of the
paper out port.
4. Check the position of the recording paper to ensure that the recording paper is
aligned with the paper outlet.

CAUTION:
 Must use the thermo-sensitive paper that meets requirements; otherwise, it will
lead to recording failure, bad-quality record or damage of thermo-sensitive
printing head.
 Do not pull out the recording paper during recorder printing, otherwise the
recording meter may be damaged.
 Unless for paper replacement or fault remedy, don’t keep the recorder door
open.

19.8. Clearing Jam Paper

While the sound of recorder operation or printing of recording meter is abnormal,

please first check whether there is paper jam in the recording meter. If so, please clear it
as per following steps:
1. Open the recorder door;
2. Pull out the recording paper, and cut off the wrinkle part;
3. Load recording paper once again and close the recording meter door.

19.9. Cleaning Recorder

After long-time service, some paper scrap and impurity will accumulate on the
printing head, and affect printing quality as well as the service life of printing head and
roll shaft. The recorder can be cleaned according to the following methods:
1. Before cleaning, the measures such as wearing anti-static wrist strap shall
be adopted to avoid the damage to recording meter resulting from static;

19-5
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

2. Open the recorder door and pull out recording paper;

3. Use a tampon with some alcohol to sweep slightly the surface of
thermo-sensitive parts of printing head;
4. After the alcohol entirely vaporizes, load recording paper once again and
close the recorder’s door.

CAUTION:
 Don’t use any article that can damage the thermo-sensitive parts of recorder
during cleaning.
 Don’t heavily press the printing head of recorder.

19-6
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Chapter 20 Other Functions

20.1. Analog Signal Output

The monitor has an auxiliary output port that can provide “analog signal output”.
Connect the monitor to equipment such as an oscillograph, and then do some associated
setup, after that you can output the analog signal to the oscillograph through the port.
The setting ways of analog signal output are as below:
1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select【Module】submenu→【Auxiliary Output】submenu.
3. Select 【Analog Output】, set the analog output signal as required.

CAUTION:
 Analog output function is seldom used in clinic. If you need t know more
detailed information, please contact the service personnel.

20.2. Network Settings

20.2.1. Setting the type of network

The steps for setting the network type are as follows:

1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select 【Network Setup】 submenu → 【Network Type】.
3. Set to 【LAN】 or 【WLAN】 according to the network type used.

20.2.2. Setting the Wired Network

To set the wired network, follow this procedure:

1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.

20-1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

2. Select 【Network Setup】 submenu → 【LAN】 submenu.

3. Select how to get the IP address:
 【Obtain IP Address Automatically】: The monitor automatically
gets the IP address.
 【Use the Following Address】: you need to input the 【IP Address】,
【Subnet mask】 and 【Gateway】.

20.2.3. Setting the Wireless network

To set the wireless network, follow this procedure:

1. Select【Network Setup】quick key.
2. The interface will show the surrounding wireless network, and you can
choose to use the wireless network according to your needs.
3. If you need to manually add a wireless network, you can select the 【Add
Net】 button at the bottom of the menu to set the 【SSID】, 【Security】,
【Password】 and 【DHCP】 of the network:
 【SSID】：Set name of the network.
 【Security】：Set the encryption method.
 【Password】：Set the password to enter the network.
 【DHCP】：Open 【DHCP】, and the monitor will automatically acquire
the IP address; if close 【DHCP】, you need to manually enter the IP
address, subnet mask and gateway.

20.2.4. Setting the wireless network frequency and antenna type

The steps for setting the wireless network frequency and antenna type are as follows:
1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select 【Network Setup】 submenu → 【WLAN】 submenu.
3. Set the 【Frequency】 and 【Antenna】 of the wireless network according
to the usage.
 【Frequency】:【5G】 or 【2.4G】.

20-2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

 【Antenna】: 【Build-in】 or 【External】.

4. Restart the monitor

20.2.5. Connecting the Central Monitoring System (CMS)

The monitor can be connected to the central monitoring system via wired network or
wireless network.

20.2.5.1. Setting the CMS IP Address

To set the IP address of CMS, follow this procedure:

1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select 【Network Setup】 submenu → 【CMS】 submenu.
3. Set the IP address of the CMS. The monitor can be received by the CMS of
the IP address.

20.2.5.2. Setting the device number of the monitor

The device number of the networked monitor will be displayed when the central
monitoring system and other beds are monitored. The steps for setting the device
number of the monitor are as follows:
1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.
2. Select 【Network Setup】 submenu → 【CMS】 submenu.
3. Set 【Device No.】 of the monitor.
Please refer to the Central Monitoring System User’s Manual for detailed
instructions.

NOTE: This monitor can only be connected to the central monitoring system

provided by the manufacturer. Do not try to connect the monitor to

other central monitoring system.

20-3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

20.3. HL7 Settings

The real-time data, waveforms, and alarms of the monitor can be transmitted to
the hospital’s monitoring system through the HL7 protocol. The operating steps are as
follows:
1. Select 【 Main Menu 】 quick key→from 【 System 】 column to select
【Maintenance】→input maintenance password→Enter.

2. Select 【Network Setup】 submenu → 【HL7】 submenu.

3. Select 【Parameter】, 【Waveform】and 【Alarm】sending function as

required.
 From 【Physiological data】 column to select monitor as 【Server】
or 【Client】. If select the monitor as 【Client】, set the 【IP】 and
【Port】 for the server receiving the real-time data and waveform. And
can set 【Interval】of data.

 From 【Alarm Data】 column to select monitor as 【Server】 or

【Client】. If select the monitor as 【Client】, set the 【IP】 and
【 Server Port】 for the server receiving the real-time data and
waveform.

20-4
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Chapter 21 Battery
21.1. Introduction

The monitor can be fitted with rechargeable battery to ensure the normal use of
the monitor in case of intra-hospital patient transfer or whenever the power supply is
interrupted. When the monitor is switched on with AC power, the battery can be
charged regardless of whether the monitor is switched on or not. Since we do not
provide external charging equipment, the battery can only be charged in the monitor.
In case of sudden power failure, the system will automatically use battery to supply
power to the monitor, thus not causing interruption of monitoring work.
On-screen battery symbols indicate the battery status as follows:

Indicate that the battery works correctly. The solid portion represents the

battery’s charge.

Indicate that the battery is almost depleted and needs to be charged

immediately. Otherwise, the monitor will be automatically shut down. In

this case, the monitor sends out an alarm message.

Indicate that no battery is installed.

The power supply of battery can only function for a certain period. Excessively
low voltage of battery will trigger a high priority technical alarm 【Battery Low】. At
this moment, the monitor shall immediately connect with alternating current power
supply to charge the battery.

In case of long-term monitoring, a backup battery shall be installed and used after
the AC power is plugged in. The AC power plug must be plugged into the special
interface of the hospital.

21.2. Installing a Battery

The battery of this monitor must be installed and replaced by maintenance personnel
trained and authorized by our company.

21.3. Battery Guidelines

The service life of the battery depends on the frequency and time of use. If
21-1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

lithium batteries are properly maintained and stored, their service life is about 3 years.
If batteries are used improperly, their life may be shorter. We recommend replacing
lithium batteries every 3 years.

In order to ensure the maximum capacity of the battery, please pay attention to
the following instructions:

 The battery performance must be checked every two months. Before the
monitor is repaired or when you suspect that the battery is the source of the
fault, battery performance inspection is also required.

 When the battery is used or stored for three months or when the running time of
the battery is significantly shortened, the battery performance is optimized
once.

 If the monitor is not used for a long time, please optimize the battery
performance every three months. Because not taking out the battery will
shorten the battery life.

 If the lithium battery is put on hold when its charge is 50% of its full charge,
the storage life of the lithium battery is about 6 months. After 6 months, the
lithium battery must be used up before being charged to full capacity. The
monitor is powered by the lithium battery, and the battery is taken out of the
monitor and then put on hold when the battery is 50% of the full charge.

WARNING:
 Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
 Use only batteries specified in the manufacturer.
 If the battery shows signs of damage or signs of leakage, replace it immediately.
Do not use a faulty battery in the monitor.

21.4. Battery Maintenance

21.4.1. Optimizing Battery Performance

A battery should be optimized before it is used for the first time. A battery

21-2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

optimizing cycle is one uninterrupted charge of the battery, followed by an uninterrupted

battery discharge and charge. Batteries should be optimized regularly to maintain their
lifetime.

CAUTION:
 Over time and with the use of batteries, the actual storage capacity of batteries
will decrease. For old batteries, the full capacity icon does not mean that the
battery storage capacity can still meet the manufacturer’s specifications, nor
does it mean that the battery power supply time can still meet the
manufacturer’s specifications. During optimization, if the battery power
supply time is obviously shortened, please replace the battery.

To optimize a battery, follow this procedure:

1. Disconnect the monitor from the patient and stop all monitoring and
measuring procedures.
2. Connect the monitor to the AC power supply and charge the battery
continuously until the battery is full.
3. Remove the AC mains and allow the monitor to run from the battery until it
shuts off.
4. Reconnect the monitor to AC power and recharge the battery.
5. The optimizing of the battery is over.

21.4.2. Checking Battery Performance

The performance of a battery may deteriorate over time. To check the performance
of a battery, follow this procedure:
1. Disconnect the monitor from the patient and stop all monitoring and
measuring procedures.
2. Connect the monitor to AC power and charge the battery continuously until
the battery is full.
3. Disconnect AC mains and allow the monitor to run on the battery until it shuts
off.
4. The operating time of a battery reflects its performance directly. If the power

21-3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

supply time of the battery is obviously lower than the time stated in the
specification, please consider replacing the battery or contact maintenance
personnel.

CAUTION:
 If the power supply time is too short after the battery is fully charged, the
battery may have been damaged or malfunctioned. The power supply time of
the battery depends on the equipment configuration and operation. For
example, frequent NIBP measurement will also shorten the power supply time
of the battery.

21.5. Battery Recycling

When a battery has visual signs of damage, or no longer holds a charge, it should be
replaced. Removed the old battery from the monitor and recycle it properly. To dispose of
the batteries, follow local laws for proper disposal.

WARNING:
 Do not disassemble batteries, or dispose of them in fire, or cause them to short
circuit. They may ignite, explode, or leak, causing personal injury.

21-4
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Chapter 22 Maintenance and Cleaning

Use only the materials and methods listed in this section to clean or disinfect the
monitor and accessories. We do not provide any guarantee for damages or accidents
caused by the use of other materials or methods.
Our company is not responsible for the effectiveness of the listed chemicals or
methods as a means of controlling infection. Please consult the hospital’s Infection
Control Officer or Epidemiologist.

22.1. Introduction

Keep your equipment and accessories free of the dust and dirt. To avoid damage to
the equipment, follow these rules:
 Please dilute the detergent and disinfectant according to the manufacturer’s
instructions, or use as low a concentration as possible.
 Do not immerse the monitor in liquid.
 Do not pour liquid on the monitor or accessories.
 Do not allow liquid to enter the cabinet.
 Abrasive materials (such as steel wool or silver polishing agent) and any strong
solvent (such as acetone or detergent containing acetone) as well as liquids with
strong conductivity (such as physiological saline) shall not be used.
 Please do not clean or disinfect the equipment when it is running or when it
is exposed to direct sunlight.
 Ensure that all parts of the equipment are completely dry after cleaning and
disinfection.

WARNING:
 Disconnect the power cord from the socket before cleaning the monitor.

CAUTION:
 If you accidentally pour liquid on the monitor or accessories, please contact the
22-1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

maintenance personnel or our company immediately. Please do not use the

equipment until it has been detected and confirmed that it can continue to be
used.
 To clean or disinfect reusable accessories, please refer to the instructions
provided with the accessories.

22.2. Cleaning of the Monitor

Monitors should be cleaned regularly. If there is heavy pollution or lots of dust and
sand in your place, the monitor should be cleaned more frequently. Before cleaning the
monitor, consult the hospital’s regulations for cleaning the monitor.
Use a soft cloth that cannot bear balls, wet and clean it with an appropriate amount of
water or alcohol-based detergent (such as 70% ethanol). Do not use strong solvents such
as acetone or tichlorothylene. Be careful when cleaning the monitor’s screen, which is
more sensitive than the case. The interface and metal parts of the equipment should be
avoided. After cleaning, the equipment should be placed in a ventilated and cool
environment to dry.

CAUTION：
 Interfaces and metal parts may be corroded after contacting with detergent.

22.3. Disinfection

You can disinfect the equipment according to the hospital’s disinfection procedures.
Clean the monitor before disinfection. The following table lists the recommended
disinfectants:
Name Type Manufacturer
Isopropyl alcohol, 70% Liquid -
Sodium hypochlorite, 0.5% Liquid -
Alcohol, 70% Liquid -
Hydrogen peroxide, 3% Liquid -

22-2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

22.4. Cleaning and Sterilizing of Accessories

For cleaning, disinfection and sterilization methods of reusable accessories such as

sensors, cables and lead wires, please refer to the instructions of relevant accessories.
Please refer to this section if the attachment does not include instructions.

22.4.1. Safety information

CAUTION:
 Do not immerse accessories in water or disinfectant.
 Do not wet the pins of the accessories.
 Frequent disinfection of accessories can cause damage to them. It is suggested
that according to hospital regulations, accessories should be disinfected only
when necessary.
 When cleaning and disinfecting NIBP airpipe, liquid should be prevented from
entering the airpipe.
 Use only the detergents and disinfectants specified in this manual.

22.4.2. Cleaning of the accessories

Use a soft cloth that cannot bear balls, wet and clean the accessories with an
appropriate amount of water or alcohol-based detergent (such as 70% ethanol). After
cleaning, place the accessories in a cool and ventilated environment to dry.

22.4.3. Disinfection of the accessories

You can disinfect the accessories of the monitor according to the disinfection
procedures of the hospital. Recommended disinfectants include:

Name Type Manufacturer

Isopropyl alcohol, 70% Liquid -
Sodium hypochlorite, 10% Liquid -
Alcohol, 70% Liquid -
Hydrogen peroxide, 3% Liquid -
Glutaraldehyde solution, 2% Liquid -

22-3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

22.5. Sterilization

Sterilization of this monitor, related products or accessories is not allowed unless

otherwise stated in the accompanying instructions.

22-4
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Chapter 23 Maintenance

WARNING:
 Failure on the part of the responsible individual hospital or institution
employing the use of this equipment to implement a satisfactory maintenance
schedule may cause undue equipment failure and possible health hazards.
 The safety checks or maintenance involving any disassembly of the equipment
should be performed by professional servicing personnel. Otherwise, undue
equipment failure and possible health hazards could result.
 If necessary, please contact the manufacturer for product circuit diagrams,
parts lists, calibration instructions or other equipment maintenance related
information.
 If there is a problem with the monitor, please contact the maintenance
personnel or us.

23.1. Inspection

Before use, after continuous use for 6-12 months, maintenance or upgrade, qualified
maintenance personnel should conduct a comprehensive inspection to ensure the normal
operation and work of the monitor.
Items to be inspected shall include:
 The environment and power supply meet the requirements.
 There is no mechanical damage to the monitor and accessories.
 The power cord has no abrasion and good insulation performance.
 Use the specified accessories.
 The alarm system functions normally.
 The recorder works normally and the recording paper meets the specified
requirements.
 The performance of the battery.
 Various monitoring functions are in good working condition.
 Grounding impedance and leakage current meet the requirements.

23-1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

If any damage or abnormal phenomenon is found, please do not use the monitor and
immediately contact the medical engineer of the hospital or the maintenance personnel of
the company.

23.2. Maintenance Schedule

The following tasks, except visual inspection, startup detection, touch screen
calibration, battery inspection and recorder inspection, can only be completed by
professional maintenance personnel. Please contact the maintenance personnel in time
when the following maintenance is required. Before testing or maintenance, the equipment
must be cleaned and disinfected.

Check / Maintenance item Recommended frequency

Preventative Maintenance Tests
Visual inspection Every day, before first use
ECG HR detect 1. When the user suspects that the measured
Calibration detect value is inaccurate.
RESP RR detect 2. After the relevant modules are repaired or
SpO2 SpO2 detect replaced.
PR detect 3. For DM and CO2 module, at least once every

TEMP TEMP detect a year.

NIBP Leakage detect 4. For other module, at least once every two

Static pressure detect years.

Pressure calibration
CO2 CO2 gas detect
Static pressure detect
IBP
Pressure calibration
DM Drip rate detect
Nurse call detect
Analog output test When you suspect that the function is not normal.
Defibrillation synchronization test
Electrical Safety Tests
Select test items based on IEC 1. After repairing or replacing the power

23-2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

60601-1 module.
2. Or after the monitor falls.
3. At least once every two years or as required.
Other Tests
Power-on test Before use.
Network print test 1. During the first installation.
2. After repairing or replacing the printer.
Recorder check 1. Before the first use.
2. After repairing or replacing the recorder.
1. During the first installation.
Functionality test
Battery 2. After replacing the battery
check Every two months or when the running time of
Performance test
the battery is significantly shortened.

23.3. Disposing of the Monitor

After the equipment reaches its service life, please dispose of the monitor and its
accessories according to local regulations.

WARNING:
 For the disposal of parts and accessories, if there is no corresponding
regulation, local regulations on disposal of hospital waste can be followed.

23-3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Chapter 24 Accessories

WARNING:
 Use only the accessories specified in this chapter. Use of other accessories may
damage the monitor or fail to meet the specifications claimed in this manual.
 The accessories listed in this chapter must be used together with the
monitoring equipment of our company. The user has the responsibility to read
the operating instructions of the equipment (including accessories) or contact
us for consultation to confirm the matching between the accessories and the
equipment. Otherwise, it may cause injury to the patient.
 Disposable accessories can only be used once. Repeated use may cause
performance degradation or cross infection.
 Do not open the disposable or sterilized accessory package too early, so as not
to cause the accessory to fail or become contaminated.

CAUTION:
 If the use or storage environment of accessories exceeds the specified
temperature or humidity range, the performance of accessories may not meet
the claimed specifications. If the performance of accessories is degraded due to
aging or environmental conditions, please contact customer service personnel.
 If there are signs of damage to the package of the accessory or the accessory
itself, please do not use the accessory.
 Do not use the accessory if it expires.
 Disposable accessories must be handled in accordance with local regulations or
hospital systems.

NOTE:

 For accessories with safe service life, see the package of accessories for service

24-1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

life.
 Please refer to the package of accessories for sterilization accessories. If the
package of the accessories of the sterilization package is damaged, please do
not use it.

24.1. Recommended Accessories

 ECG
Accessories Specification Model / PN
3-lead,IEC,Snap (12PIN) 15-031-0013
5-lead,IEC,Snap (12PIN) 15-031-0002
5-lead,IEC,Clip (12PIN) 15-100-0370
6-lead,IEC,Snap (12PIN) 15-031-0051
12-lead,IEC,Snap (12PIN) 15-031-0001
5-lead,IEC,Clip (12PIN)(plug-in) 15-031-0022
ECG cable 3-lead,AHA,Snap (12PIN) 15-031-0014
5-lead,AHA,Snap (12PIN) 15-031-0004
6-lead,AHA,Snap (12PIN) 15-031-0050
12-lead,AHA,Snap (12PIN) 15-031-0003
3-lead,AHA,Snap (12PIN)(plug-in) 15-100-0196
5-lead,AHA,Clip (12PIN)(plug-in) 15-031-0021
5-lead,AHA,Snap (12PIN)(plug-in) 15-100-0197
Electrode with snap
Reusable 15-100-0077
clips

 SpO2
Accessories Specification Model / PN
SpO2 sensor Ear clip SpO2 sensor 15-100-0325
Reusable ,Tongue clip (small) 15-100-0079
Tongue clip
Reusable ,Tongue clip (large) 15-100-0189
SpO2 Extension
Reusable 15-100-0357
cable

24-2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

 TEMP
Accessories Specification Model / PN
Reusable, Surface 15-031-0005
TEMP Probe
Reusable, Coelom 15-031-0012

 NIBP
Accessories Specification Model / PN
Disposable cuff，3-5.5CM 15-100-0164
Disposable cuff，4-8CM 15-100-0165
NIBP cuff Disposable cuff，6-11CM 15-100-0166
Disposable cuff，7-13CM 15-100-0167
Disposable cuff，9-14.5CM 15-100-0168
NIBP air pipe Reusable 15-031-0008

 CO2
BLT Mainstream CO2
Accessories Model / PN
CO2 sensor 15-100-0199
Airway adapter 15-100-0212
Airway adapter 15-100-0213

BLT Microflow CO2

Accessories Model / PN
CO2 filter 15-100-0354
CO2 sampling tube 15-100-0187
CO2 sensor 15-100-0185
CO2 L-type 3-way stopcock 15-100-0074
CO2 pipe 15-100-0035
CO2 sampling tube 15-100-0188
CO2 T-type 3-way stopcock 15-100-0343

24-3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Masimo Mainstream CO2

Specification Model / PN
CO2 sensor REF:200101
Airway adapter REF:106220/PN:4499
Airway adapter REF:105250

Masimo Microflow CO2

Accessories Model / PN
CO2 module 4410
HH, Airway Adapter Set 3827
HH, Airway Adapter Set (3m) 3828
HH, Airway Adapter Set 3829
LH, Nasal/Oral Cannula 3822
LH, Nasal/Oral Cannula 3823
HH, Nasal Cannula 3830
HH, Nasal Cannula 3831
HH, Nasal Cannula 3832
HH, Nasal/Oral Cannula 3835
HH, Nasal/Oral Cannula 3836
HH, Nasal Cannula with O2 delivery 3833
HH, Nasal Cannula with O2 delivery 3834
HH, Nasal Cannula/Oral with O2 delivery 3837
HH, Nasal Cannula/Oral with O2 delivery 3838

CO2 extension cable

Accessories Model / PN
Reusable, CO2 extension cable 15-031-0010
Reusable, CO2 extension cable 15-031-0011

 IBP
Accessories Model / PN
IBP sensor PT-1/15-100-0053

24-4
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Accessories Model / PN
IBP cable 15-100-0029
IBP extension cable (4PIN to 6PIN) 15-031-0023
IBP cable 15-100-0098
IBP sensor PT-01/15-100-0097
IBP cable 15-100-0136
IBP cable 15-100-0137
IBP cable 15-100-0143

 DM module
Accessories Model / PN
DM module 16-100-0113

 C.O.
Accessories Model / PN
C.O. interface cable (6PIN) 15-100-0148
Sensor cable SP4042
Sensor cap SP5045
Tricyclic syringe 15-100-0169/RFF：620161

24-5
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Appendix A Product Specifications

A.1 Safety Specifications

The monitor is Classified according to the IEC60601-1 is as follows:

Classifica Recommen
Degree of Degree of Degree of
tion of ded
protectio protectio protection
protectio disinfection Mode of
Parts n against n against against
n against and operation
electric ingress of hazards of
electric sterilization
shock liquid explosion
shock methods

Mainframe I No mark

Fixed
parameter See Chapter
(ECG, 22
TEMP, Maintenanc
CF Continuou
RESP, NIBP, IP21 Not suitable e and
SpO2) NA s
Cleaning of

IBP this manual

C.O. for details.

CO2
BF
DM

Note:
I: Class I, internally and externally powered equipment.
When you doubt about the protecting earth integrality or protecting earth lead of the
equipment, you’d better change the equipment to internally powered equipment.
CF: Type CF applied part.
BF: Type BF applied part.
NA: Not applicable
Not suitable: Equipment is not suitable for use in the presence of flammable
anesthetic mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.

1
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

A.2 Environmental Specifications

Mainframe 0℃～40℃
Operating
temperature 5℃～40℃
CO2 module (external)

Operating humidity 15%～95%（non-condensing）

Operating Mainframe 57kPa～107.4kPa

atmospheric
CO2 module (external) 86 kPa～106 kPa
pressure
Transportation Mainframe -20℃～+60℃
and storage
CO2 module (external) -40℃～+70℃
temperature
Transportation Mainframe 10%～95%（non-condensing）
and storage
CO2 module (external) <90%（non-condensing）
humidity
Transportation Mainframe 16.0kPa～107.4kPa
and storage
atmospheric CO2 module (external) 86 kPa～106 kPa
pressure

CAUTION:
 The equipment must be used under the specified environmental specifications,
otherwise it will not meet the technical specifications claimed in this manual
and may lead to unexpected consequences such as equipment damage. If the
performance of the equipment changes due to aging or environmental
conditions, please contact the maintenance personnel.

A.3 Physical Specifications

Model Weight Size (W×H×D) Remark

Including screen, stationary parameter
175mm * 320mm*
S12 Vet <4kg module, a lithium battery, a recorder,
262mm
without accessories.

2
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

A.4 Power Specifications

A.4.1 External power supply

Input voltage AC (100-240) V(±10%)

Frequency 50Hz/60Hz
Input power 100VA
Standard requirements According to IEC 60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-2

A.4.2 Battery

Battery (Standard configuration)

Type Rechargeable lithium ion battery, 11.1 VDC, 2500mAh
Operating time In a new and fully charged battery at (25℃) ambient temperature,
typical configuration (connected to SpO2; not connected to ECG
and TEMP cable, and NIBP works in an automatic measurement
mode with a time interval of 30 min; Screen brightness is the
factory default value):
S12 Vet: ≥4h
Charge time The monitor is charged to 90% for less than 3 hours and 100% for
less than 4 hours when it is turned off.
When the monitor is turned on, it is charged to 90% for less than 5
hours and 100% for less than 6 hours.
Turn off delay 5 min-15min（after the low battery alarm first occurs）
Battery (optional configuration)
Type Rechargeable lithium ion battery, 11.1 VDC, 5000mAh
Operating time In a new and fully charged battery at (25℃) ambient temperature,
typical configuration (connected to SpO2; not connected to ECG
and TEMP cable, and NIBP works in an automatic measurement
mode with a time interval of 30 min; Screen brightness is the
factory default value):
S12 Vet: ≥8h
Charge time The monitor is charged to 90% for less than 6 hours and 100% for

3
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

less than 8 hours when it is turned off.

When the monitor is turned on, it is charged to 90% for less than
11 hours and 100% for less than 12 hours.
Turn off delay 5 min-15min（after the low battery alarm first occurs）

A.5 Hardware Specifications

A.5.1 Display

Host display
Type Color TFT LCD
S12 Vet Size（diagonal） 12.1 inch

Resolution 800×600 pixels

External display
Type TFT display

A.5.2 Recorder

Type BTR50S thermal dot array

Paper width 50 mm±1mm
Recording speed 12.5 mm/s, 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s
Recording waveform Maximum 3 tracks

A.5.3 Mainframe LED

Alarm lamp Cyan, yellow and red

Power indicating lamp 1 (Green/Orange)
When powered with AC, it lights green while turn on and off
the monitor.
When powered with battery, the orange light is on when the
battery is turned on, and no light is on when the battery is
turned off.
Battery charging 1 (yellow), When charging, it is always on, and when it is fully

4
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

indicating lamp charged, the light goes out.

A.5.4 Audio indicating

Speaker Give alarm tone (45-85dB), QRS tones;

Support PITCH TONE and multi-level tone modulation;
Alarm tones meet the requirements of IEC 60601-1-8.

A.5.5 Input device

Keys
Physical keys 1 power switch key
Touch screen Support
Others
Mouse input Support (optional)
Keyboard input Support (optional)
Barcode scanner Support (optional)
Voice assistant Support (optional)

A.5.6 Connectors

Power 1 AC power inlet with cable retainer

Wired network 1 standard RJ45 interfaces
USB 2 standard USB 2.0 sockets
VGA 1 standard VGA connector (optional)
Equipotential grounding 1
point
Multifunctional (nurse 1 (optional)
call, defibrillation
synchronization and
analog output) interface

5
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

A.5.7 Signal Output

Auxiliary output interface (optional)

Meet the requirements of IEC 60601-1 for short-circuit
Standard
protection and leakage current.
Output impedance Rated 50Ω
ECG analog signals output
Output signal range -10V～+10V
Maximum
25 ms
transmission delay
Sensitivity 1V/mV±5%
PACE rejection /
Has PACE rejection function
strengthen
IBP analog signals output
Output signal range -1V～+4V
Maximum
35 ms
transmission delay
Sensitivity 1V/100mHg±5%
Nurse call output
Output voltage range High level: 3.5~5V, providing a maximum of 10 mA output
current;
Low level: ＜ 0.5V, receiving a maximum of 5 mA input
current.
Isolated voltage 1500 VAC
Signal type N.C., N.O., Pulse Output (optional);
Rise and drop time ≤1ms
Defibrillator synchronization signal output
Output impedance 50Ω±10%
Maximum delay 25 ms (from R wave crest to pulse raise)
Amplitude High level: 3.5~5V, providing a maximum of 10 mA output
current;
Low level: ＜0.5V, receiving a maximum of 5 mA input current.

6
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Pulse width 100ms±10%

Rise and drop time ≤1ms
Alarm output
Indicates the inherent ≤1s
delay in determining
the alarm status.
Alarm delay time The alarm delay time from the monitor to remote equipment is ≤
from the monitor to 2s, measured at the monitor signal output connector.
remote equipment
Alarm signal sound Within a distance of one meter, the peak volume range of the
pressure level range audible alarm generated by the equipment is 45 dB (A) ~ 85 dB
(A).

A.6 Data Storage

Trend data Long trend: 1800h，minimum resolution is 10 min

Medium trend: 180h, minimum resolution is 1 min
Short trend: 6h, minimum resolution is 5 second.
Parameter alarm At least 3000 parameter alarm events and associated parameter
event waveform at the moment.
ARR events 3000 ARR events，and the parameter waveform related to the
time of event occurrence.
NIBP measurement At least 2400 groups.
result
Holographic At least 72 hours. The specific storage time depends on the
waveform waveforms stored and the number of stored waveform.

A.7 Wireless network

Conforming IEEE802.11a/b/g/n
standards
Operating 2.4GHz ～ 2.495 GHz, 5.15GHz ～ 5.35GHz, 5.47GHz ～
frequency

7
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

5.725GHz, 5.725 GHz～5.82GHz

Data security WPA-PSK、WPA2-PSK
Encryption AES、TKIP

A.8 Measurement Specifications

The product shall meet the following measurement specifications. If there is no

special indication, the definition of the index shall preferentially refer to the special
standard of the parameter.

A.8.1 ECG

A.8.1.1 Standard

Refer to standards of IEC 60601-2-27

Refer to standards of IEC 60601-2-25

A.8.1.2 Performance indicators

Cut mode: 300W

Coagulate mode: 100W
Electrosurgery
Recovery time: ≤10s
protection
In compliance with the requirements in clause 202.6.2.101 of
IEC 60601-2-27.
Lead-off detection Measuring electrode: <100nA
current Driving electrode (RL): <1 Ua
Tall T-wave
1.5Mv
rejection capability
Under normal circumstances, the 12 most recent RR intervals
HR averaging are averaged to compute the HR.
method If the last 3 consecutive RR intervals are greater than 1200ms
(i.e., HR is less than 50bpm), the 4 most recent RR intervals are

8
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

averaged to compute the HR.

The HR value displayed on the monitor screen is updated every
second.
Meet the requirements of Clause 201.7.9.2.9.101 b) 4) of IEC
60601-2-27.
The heart rate value displayed after the 20-seconed stabilization
Response to period is:
irregular rhythm Waveform 3a (Ventricular bigeminy): 80bpm;
Waveform 3b (Slow alternating ventricular bigeminy): 60bpm
Waveform 3c (Rapid alternating ventricular bigeminy): 120bpm
Waveform 3d (Bidirectional systoles): 90bpm
Response time to HR change from 80bpm to 120bpm: < 10s.
heart rate change HR change from 80bpm to 40bpm: <10s.
Time to alarm for
<11s
Tachycardia
Amplitude: ±2mV~±700mV
Pace pulse markers
Pulse width: 0.1~2.0ms
Pacemaker pulse Rejection of pacemaker pulses with amplitudes from ± 2 mV to
rejection capability ± 700 mV and widths from 0.1ms to 2.0ms. Heart rate
without overshoot. calculation should not be affected.
Minimum slew rate
for pacing pulse 12.5V/s ± 20%
detection.
Pacing pulse display
method in auxiliary Suppression
output
Pacing function
Pace markers function can be switched on and off.
switch
Defibrillation output
25ms
delay
ECG Analog Output
25ms
Delay

9
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

A.8.1.3 ECG Measurement

3-lead: I, II, III

5-lead: I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V-
Lead type 6-lead: I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF,Va, Vb
12-lead: I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF,V1~V6
Auto: identify leads automatically
Indication of lead-off shall
Every electrode
be provided
ECG abnormal work Every amplification channel shall have an indication of
indications abnormal ECG operation (polarization).
Diagnostic mode: 0.05~150Hz
Monitor mode: 0.5~40Hz
Bandwidth (-3dB)
Operation mode: 1~25Hz
ST mode: 0.05~40Hz
Signal quality display Expression way: numerical display and waveform color.
Breakdown Voltage: 4000V 50Hz/60Hz
Defibrillation Protection Anti-defibrillation effect protection: baseline recovery
time: 5s (after defibrillation).
Input signal range -10.0mV~+10.0Mv
Input signal range Electrode offset
±500 mV d.c.
potential
Input impedance ≥5.0MΩ
System noise ≤30μVpp RTI
Waveform Display 6.25mm/s, 12.5mm/s, 25mm/s, 50mm/s, error ≤±5%
sweep speed Recorder 12.5mm/s, 25mm/s, 50mm/s, error ≤±5%
×0.25, ×0.5, ×1 (10mm/mV), ×2, ×4, error ≤±5%.
Waveform Display
Auto
Gain
Recorder ×0.25, ×0.5, ×1 (10mm/mV), ×2, ×4, error ≤±5%.
Diagnostic mode ≥100 dB
CMRR Monitor, Operation
≥110 dB
mode

10
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Calibration voltage ≤±5%（×1）

Input offset current ＜0.1uA

Monitoring mode: ≥0.3s
Time constant
Diagnostic mode: ≥3.2s

A.8.1.4 ECG analysis calculation

Measurement
HR, PVCs, ST, QT, and Arrhythmia analysis
parameter
Multi-lead Supports synchronous analysis of at least 2 leads, one of which
synchronous is the key monitoring lead and the other is the auxiliary lead. It
analysis function is on except 3-lead mode.
Automatic, Manual; Default manual
(3-lead mode is fixed as manual)
Smart Lead Switch Automatic mode: the algorithm automatically identifies the
current smart leads, and the host automatically switches the key
monitoring leads according to the identification of the algorithm.
Measurement
10~400 bpm
range
HR measurement Resolution 1 bpm
range and accuracy Accuracy ±1% or ±1 bpm, whichever is greater
Detection
0.20mVp-p
sensitivity
Display 12-lead ST segment values at the same time and support
ST Display
ST graphic display.
Measurement
-2.0mV~2.0mV
range
ST measurement Resolution 0.01mV
range and accuracy -0.8mV~0.8mV: ±0.02mV or ±10%,
Accuracy whichever is greater
Other: Unspecified
ST Update period 10s

11
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Indicates the number of PVC in the past minute, ranging from

PVCs measurement
0/min ~150/min.
Arrhythmia analysis
27 (see Table 2)
type
QT: 200ms~700ms
QTc: 200ms~700ms
Measurement deltaQTc: -500ms~500ms
range QT-HR:
QT analysis function Big animal: 15bpm~150bpm
Small animal: 15bpm~180bpm
QT: 1ms
Resolution
QTc: 1ms
Accuracy QT: ±30ms
Sampling rate 1000Hz (The time bias among every channels ≤100us)
Amplitude
≤1 uV/LSB
quantisation

Table 2 Arrhythmia Events list

No. Full Name Prompt information

1 Asystole Asystole
Ventricular Fibrillation/
2 Vent Fib/Tach
Ventricular Tachycardia
3 Ventricular Tachycardia V-Tach
4 Ventricular Bradycardia Vent Brady
5 Extreme Tachycardia Extreme Tachy
6 Extreme Bradycardia Extreme Brady
7 R on T R on T
8 Tachycardia Tachy
9 Bradycardia Brady
10 Nonsustained Ventricular Tachycardia Nonsustained V-Tach
11 Ventricular Rhythm Vent Rhythm

12
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

No. Full Name Prompt information

12 Pacer Not Captured PNC
13 Pacer Not Pacing PNP
14 Heartbeat Pause Pause
15 Pauses/min High Pauses/min High
16 Run PVCs Run PVCs
17 Couplet Couplet
18 VentricularBigeminy Bigeminy
19 VentricularTrigeminy Trigeminy
20 Frequent PVCs Frequent PVCs
21 Premature ventricular contraction PVC
22 Missed Beat Missed Beat
23 Atrial Fibrillation A-Fib
24 Atrial Fibrillation End A-Fib End
25 ECGNoise ECG Noise
26 Irregular Rhythm Irregular Rhythm
27 Irregular Rhythm End Irregular RhythmEnd

A.8.2 RESP

A.8.2.1 Measurement specification

Measurement
RR and respiration waveform
parameter
Source RA-LA, RA-LL (default)
64 kHz
Excitation waveform
Error: ≤±10%
Excitation current ≤0.3mA RMS
Respiration Apnea Fixed high priority alarm
Alarm Adjustable delay time: 10~60s, error ±3s or ±10%
Cardiac interference
Fixed high priority alarm
alert

13
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Measurement range 0~150 rpm

RR measurement
Resolution 1 rpm
range and accuracy
Accuracy ±2 rpm or ±2%, whichever is greater.
Bandwidth 0.2 Hz ~2.5Hz
Sweep speed 6.25mm/s, 12.5mm/s, 25mm/s, 50mm/s, ±10%
Baseline impedance 200~2500Ω (using defibrillator proof cable with resistance of
range 1kΩ)
Measuring impedance
0.3Ω~3Ω
range
Gain ×0.25, ×0.5, ×1, ×2, ×4

A.8.3 NIBP

A.8.3.1 Standard

Refer to standard of IEC80601-2-30

A.8.3.2 Measurement Specification

Measurement
SYS, DIA, MAP,PR
parameters
Mode of operation Manual, Auto, STAT, Sequence
Intervals for periodic 1min, 2 min, 2.5 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min,
measurement time 30 min, 1h, 1.5h, 2h, 3h, 4h, 8h
At least 5 groups are supported, and each group individually
Sequence mode
sets the interval and number of periodic measurement.
STAT mode cycle
5 min
time
Measurement range
0~300 mmHg
of cuff pressure

Initial inflation Big animal: 120~280mmHg，default 160mmHg

pressure Small animal: 60~280mmHg，default 160mmHg

14
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Sensor calibration
One year (recommend)
time
Unit mmHg, kPa
Systolic 30~270 mmHg
Dynamic pressure
Diastolic 10~220 mmHg
measurement range
Mean 20~235 mmHg
Dynamic Pressure Systolic 35~255mmHg: ±8 mmHg
Measurement Error Diastolic 15~195mmHg: ±8 mmHg
of Simulator Mean 22~215mmHg: ±8 mmHg
Static pressure
±3 mmHg（±0.4kPa）
accuracy
Pressure resolution 1 mmHg or 0.1kPa
Measurement
PR measurement 40 ~ 240 bpm
range
range and accuracy
Accuracy ±3bpm or ±3%, whichever is greater
Maximum
<120s
measurement time
First overpressure
297±3 mmHg
protection point
Second overpressure
315±10 mmHg
protection point
Note: The accuracy of NIBP cannot be determined by using a simulator, but under many
conditions, it is still necessary to use a simulator to test its performance (for example, a
simulator is required for quality control in the production process), and the simulator of
the model specified by the manufacturer shall be used for this performance test.

A.8.4 SpO2

A.8.4.1 Standard

Refer to the standard of ISO 80601-2-61

15
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

A.8.4.2 Specification

SpO2, PR, PI and RR, SpO2 waveform and respiration

Measurement parameter
waveform.
Sensitivity High, Medium, Low
Measurement range 0~100%
Measurement range and
Simulator measurement 70%~100%: ±2%
accuracy
error 0~69% unspecified
Normal ≤2s
SpO2 Update period
Maximum ≤25s
High ≤8s
SpO2 Response time Sensitivity medium ≤11s
Low ≤15s
Measurement range 25 bpm ~400 bpm
PR Resolution 1 bpm
Accuracy ± 3bpm
Measurement range At least 0.05~20.00%
Resolution 0.01%
PI
±0.1% or ±10% of reading,
Accuracy
whichever is greater
Measurement range 0 rpm ~90 rpm
RESP (from pleth) Resolution 1 rpm
Accuracy ±2 rpm

A.8.5 TEMP

A.8.5.1 Standard

Refer to the standard of ISO 80601-2-56.

16
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

A.8.5.2 Measurement Specification

Parameter T1,T2,TD
Probe YSI400 series probe (2252Ω@25℃, accuracy ±0.1ºC)
Measurement site Surface and coelom
0.0ºC ~ 50.0ºC （ 32.0℉ ～
Measurement range
Measurement range and 122.0℉）
accuracy Resolution 0.1ºC
Accuracy of circuit ±0.1℃ (±0.2℉) (without sensor)
Power supplied to probe <20μW
Updated time Every about 1~2s
Minimum measurement Surface: ≤100s
time Coelom: ≤80s

A.8.6 IBP

A.8.6.1 Standard

Refer to the standard of IEC 60601-2-34.

A.8.6.2 Functional specification

Dual channels IBP parameters (including systolic blood

Measurement
pressure, diastolic blood pressure, average pressure, PR) and
parameters
waveforms
ART/CVP/ICP/PA/Ao/UAP/BAP/FAP//LAP/RAP/UVP/LV/P
Measurement site
AWP, additionally, P1 and P2 are arbitrary sites
Scale Manual, interval and automatic scale settings
Unit mmHg, kPa, cmH2O
Measurement
0%~50%
PPV range
Accuracy ±8% or ±10% of reading, whichever is

17
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

greater
Resolution 1%
Measurement
-50 mmHg ~+360mmHg
Static pressure range
measurement range Resolution 1 mmHg
and accuracy ±2mmHg or ±2% (whichever is greater,
Accuracy
without sensor)
Measurement
Dynamic pressure -50 mmHg ~+360mmHg
range
measurement range
±2mmHg or ±2% (whichever is greater,
and accuracy Accuracy
without sensor)
Including sensor At least d.c.~10Hz
Frequency response
Only host At least d.c.~12Hz
IBP zero range -200mmHg～+200mmHg
Measurement
30bpm ~300bpm
range
PR
Resolution 1bpm
Accuracy ±1% or ±1bpm whichever is greater
Nominal
5uV/V/ mmHg
sensitivity
Output
300Ω~3000Ω
Pressure sensor impedance
Volumetric
<0.04 mm3 /100 mmHg
displacement
Error ±2%
IBP analog output
≤35ms
delay

18
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

A.8.7 CO2

A.8.7.1 Standard

Refer to the standard of ISO 80601-2-55.

A.8.7.2 Functional Specification

Measurement
EtCO2, FiCO2, a CO2 waveform and awRR
parameter
Measurement
Mainstream, Sidestream
method

Unit mmHg, kPa and %

A.8.7.3 Performance Specification

BLT Capno_S 0%～19.7% (0mmHg～150mmHg)

Respironics
0%～19.7% (0mmHg～150mmHg)
LOFLO C5
BLT Capno_M 0%～19.7% (0mmHg～150mmHg)
EtCO2/FiCO2
Respironics
measurement range 0%～19.7% (0mmHg～150mmHg)
CAPNOSTA 5
Masimo ISA
0%～25% (0mmHg～190mmHg)
Capno
Masimo IRMA 0%～25% (0mmHg～190mmHg)
EtCO2/FiCO2
measurement ± (0.43% + 8% of reading)
accuracy
97% of the design error can be reached
Preheating time BLT Capno_S within 45s, and the design error can be
reached within 2 min.

19
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Respironics
<20s
LOFLO C5
Masimo ISA <10s (Report concentration and achieve
Capno highest accuracy)
97% of the design error can be reached
BLT Capno_M within 8s, and the design error can be
reached within 20s.
Respironics
<15s
CAPNOSTA 5
Masimo IRMA <10s
EtCO2/FiCO2 display
0.1% or 1mmHg
resolution
BLT Capno_S 3～150 bpm
Respironics
2～150 bpm
LOFLO C5
Masimo ISA
awRR measurement 0～150 bpm
Capno
range
BLT Capno_M 3～150 bpm
Respironics
0～150 bpm
CAPNOSTA 5
Masimo IRMA 0～150 bpm
awRR measurement
±1 bpm
accuracy
BLT Capno_S 50±10mL/min
Sampling frequency Respironics
50±10mL/min
and accuracy of gas LOFLO C5
(only sidestream) Masimo ISA
50±10mL/min
Capno
BLT Capno_S <3s (including delay time and rise time)
Response time Respironics
<3s (including delay time and rise time)
LOFLO C5

20
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Masimo ISA
<3s (including delay time and rise time)
Capno
BLT Capno_M About 70ms (rising time)
Respironics
<60ms (rising time)
CAPNOSTA 5
Masimo IRMA <90ms (rising time)

A.8.7.4 The effects on CO2 measuring values caused by the interfering gases

 BLT Capno_S & BLT Capno_M

The accuracy of CO2 is affected by interfering gases and water vapor. For example,
N2O, a halide-containing anesthetic gas can raise the CO2 reading (about 2%-10%), and
helium and oxygen can reduce the CO2 reading (1%-10%), so in the presence of
interfering gas, the user should send relevant command to the module (the instrument’s
compensation menu to adjust the interference gas data), so that the module (instrument)
can meet the nominal accuracy requirements.

 Respironics LOFLO C5
Gas or Vapor Gas Level Quantitative Effects
Nitrous oxide 60% No Additional Effect
Halothane 4% No Additional Effect
Enflurane 5% No Additional Effect
Isoflurane 5% No Additional Effect
Sevoflurane 5% No Additional Effect
Xenon 80% Negatively bias Carbon Dioxide
values by up to an additional 5
mmHg at 38 mmHg
Helium 50% No Additional Effect
Metered dose inhaler Unspecified Unspecified
propellants
Desflurane 15% Concentrations greater than 5% will

21
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

positively bias Carbon Dioxide

values by up to an additional 3
mmHg at 38 mmHg.
Ethanol 0.1% No Additional Effect
Isopropanol 0.1% No Additional Effect
Acetone 0.1% No Additional Effect
Methane 1% No Additional Effect

 Masimo ISA Capno & Masimo IRMA

Gas Gas level CO2 Agents N2O
ISA CO2 ISA AX+
ISA OR+
4) 2)
N2O 60 vol% – – 1) – 1) – 1)
HAL 4) 4 vol% – 1) – 1) – 1) – 1)
ENF, ISO, SEV4) 5 vol% +8% of – 1) – 1) – 1)
3)
reading
4)
DES 15 vol% +12% of – 1) – 1) – 1)
reading 3)
Xe (Xenon) 4) 80 vol% −10% of reading 3) – 1) – 1)
He (Helium) 4) 50 vol% −6% of reading 3) – 1) – 1)
Metered dose Not for use with metered dose inhaler propellants
inhaler
propellants 4)
C2H5OH 0.3 vol% – 1) – 1) – 1) – 1)
(Ethanol) 4)
C3H7OH 0.5 vol% – 1) – 1) – 1) – 1)
(Isopropanol) 4)
CH3COCH3 1 vol% – 1) – 1) – 1) – 1)
(Acetone) 4)
CH4 (Methane) 3 vol% – 1) – 1) – 1) – 1)
4)

CO (Carbon 1 vol% – 1) – 1) – 1) – 1)

22
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual
5)
monoxide)
NO (Nitrogen 0.02 vol% – 1) – 1) – 1) – 1)
monoxide) 5)
O2 5) 100 vol% – 2) – 2) – 1)
Note 1: Negligible interference, effect included in the specification “Accuracy, all
conditions” above.
Note 2: Negligible interference with N2O / O2 concentrations correctly set, effect
included in the specification “Accuracy, all conditions” above.
Note 3: Interference at indicated gas level. For example, 50 vol% Helium typically
decreases the CO2 readings by 6%. This means that if measuring on a mixture containing
5.0 vol% CO2 and 50 vol% Helium, the actual measured CO2 concentration will typically
be (1-0.06) * 5.0 vol% = 4.7 vol% CO2.
Note 4: According to the EN ISO 80601-2-55:2011 standard.
Note 5: In addition to the EN ISO 80601-2-55:2011 standard.

 Respironics CAPNOSTA 5
Gas or Vapor Gas Level
Nitrous oxide 60%
Halothane 4%
Enflurane 5%
Isoflurane 5%
Sevoflurane 5%
Xenon 80%
Helium 50%
Metered dose inhaler propellants Unspecified
Desflurane 15%
Ethanol Unspecified
Isopropanol Unspecified
Acetone Unspecified
Methane Unspecified
Additional notes regarding cross-sensitivity compensation errors:
Xenon: The presence of Xenon in the exhaled breath will negatively bias Carbon Dioxide

23
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

values by an additional 5 mmHg at 38 mmHg.

Desflurane: The presence of desflurane in the exhaled breath at concentrations greater

than 5% will positively bias Carbon Dioxide values by up to an additional 3 mmHg at 38
mmHg.

Ethanol, Isopropanol, Acetone, Methane: CO2 accuracy will not be affected by the
presence of 0.1% ethanol, 0.1% isopropanol, 0.1% acetone or 1% methane.

Quantitative effects of humidity and condensation: Full accuracy specifications will not
be maintained for all non-condensing humidity levels.

A.8.8 C.O.

Measurement range 0.1 L/min to 20 L/min

±5% or ±0.1 L/min, whichever is
C.O. Accuracy (simulator)
greater(without sensor)
Resolution 0.1 L/min
Measurement range 23.00°C ~ 43.00°C
TB Accuracy ±0.1°C(without sensor)
Resolution 0.01°C
Measurement range -1.0°C ~ 27.0°C
TI Accuracy ±0.1°C(without sensor)
Resolution 0.1°C

A.8.9 DM

A.8.9.1 Functional Specification

Alarm and stop liquid when drip rate is abnormal.

Alarm and stop liquid when infusion is completed.
Liquid stop function
When the module is powered off, the liquid stop clip is opened
without affecting the infusion.

24
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Drops/min, mL/h, can be automatically converted (for

Unit conversion, 1mL of conventional tube =20 drops is mainly
used.)

A.8.9.2 Performance Specification

Drip rate
5～200 Drops/min（1mL of conventional tube =20 drops）
measurement range
Drip accuracy ±2 and ±2% (whichever is greater)

A.9 Alarm Specification

If no special instructions are given in the following specifications, the adjustable

range of the alarm limit is the same as the measuring range of the signal.

A.9.1 ECG

Alarm limit Range Step

ST High (low limit +0.01 Mv) ~2.00mV
0.01 mV
ST Low -2.00 mV ~ (high limit -0.01 mV)
HR High (HR low limit +1bpm) ~400bpm
1bpm
HR Low 10bpm~ (HR high limit -1bpm)
QTc High 200ms～700ms
1ms
ΔQTc Low -500ms～500ms

A.9.2 RESP

Alarm limit Range Step

RR High (low limit +1 rpm) ～150rpm
1rpm
RR Low 0rpm~ (high limit -1rpm)

A.9.3 NIBP

Alarm limit Range Step

25
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Alarm limit Range Step

NIBP-S-High (low limit+1 mmHg) ~270 mmHg
1mmHg
NIBP-S-Low 30 mmHg ~ (high limit-1 mmHg)
NIBP-M-High (low limit+1mmHg) ~235 mmHg
1mmHg
NIBP-M-Low 20 mmHg ~ (high limit-1 mmHg)
NIBP-D-High (low limit+1mmHg) ~220 mmHg
1mmHg
NIBP-D-Low 10 mmHg ~ (high limit-1 mmHg)

A.9.4 SpO2

Alarm limit Range Step

SpO2 High (low limit+1％) ~100％
SpO2 Low (SpO2 Desat +1％) ~ (high limit-1％) 1％
SpO2 Desat 0％~ (low limit-1％)
PR High (PR low limit+1bpm)~400bpm
1bpm
PR Low 10bpm~ (PR high limit-1bpm)

A9.5 TEMP

Alarm limit Range Step

T1/T2 High (low limit+0.1ºC) ~50.0ºC 0.1 ºC
T1/T2 Low 0 ºC~ (high limit-0.1ºC) 0.1 ºC
TD High 0ºC~5.0ºC 0.1 ºC

A.9.6 IBP

Alarm limit Range Step

IBP-M-High (low limit +1mmHg) ~360mmHg
1mmHg
IBP-M-Low -50mmHg~ (high limit -1mmHg)
IBP-D-High (low limit +1mmHg) ~360mmHg
1mmHg
IBP-D-Low -50mmHg~ (high limit -1mmHg)
IBP-S-High (low limit +1mmHg) ~360mmHg 1mmHg

26
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Alarm limit Range Step

IBP-S-Low -50mmHg~ (high limit -1mmHg)

A.9.7 CO2

Alarm limit Range Step

Apnea delay time 20 s~60 s 5s
EtCO2 High (low limit+1mmHg) ~152mmHg
1 mmHg
Et CO2 Low 0mmHg~ (high limit-1mmHg)
Fi CO2 High 0~152mmHg 1 mmHg
awRR High (low limit+1bpm) ~150 bpm
1 bpm
awRR Low 0bpm~ (high limit-1bpm)

A.9.8 C.O.

Alarm limit Range Step

TB High (low limit +0.1ºC) ~43.0ºC 0.1 ºC
TB Low 23.0 ºC~ (high limit -0.1ºC) 0.1 ºC

27
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Appendix B EMC and Radio Regulatory Compliance

B.1 EMC

The monitor complies with IEC 60601-1-2. All accessories listed in the accessories
listed in the accessories of this manual meet the requirements of IEC 60601-1-2 when
used with this equipment.

CAUTION:
 The monitor conforms to the electromagnetic compatibility requirements in
IEC 60601-1-2, ISO 80601-2-55, IEC 80601-2-30, IEC 80601-2-49, ISO
80601-2-61, IEC 60601-2-34 standards.
 The user shall install and use according to the electromagnetic compatibility
information provided by the accompanying documents.
 Portable and mobile RF communication equipment may affect the
performance of this monitor, and strong electromagnetic interference should
be avoided during use, such as close to mobile phones, microwave ovens, etc.
 The guidelines and the manufacturer’s statement are detailed in the appendix.
 The device needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs to be installed
and put into service according to the EMC information provided below.
 Portable and mobile communication equipment may affect the performance of
this monitor.
 Other devices that have RF transmitter or source may affect this device (e.g.
cell phones, PADs, PCs with wireless function).

WARNING:
 The monitor should not be used close to or stacked on top of other equipment.
If it must be used close to or stacked on top of other equipment, it should be
observed and verified that it can operate normally under its used

28
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

configuration.
 Class A equipment is intended to be used in industrial environment. Due to
conduction disturbance and radiation disturbance of this monitor, there may
be potential difficulties in ensuring electromagnetic compatibility in other
environments.
 In addition to cables sold by the manufacturer of this monitor as spare parts
for internal components, the use of accessories and cables other than those
specified may result in increased emission or reduced immunity of this
monitor.
 Even if other equipment meets the emission requirements of corresponding
national standards, this monitor may still be interfered by other equipment.
 A warning that operation of the EQUIPMENT or SYSTEM below the
minimum amplitude or value may cause inaccurate results. The minimum
amplitude or value of patient physiological signal: the minimum amplitude of
ECG signal is 0.5mV, the minimum value of PR is 30bpm and the minimum
value of SpO2 is 70%.

Table 1
Guidance and manufacture’s declaration – electromagnetic emission
The monitor is intended for use in the environment specified below. The customer or the user of
the monitor should assure that it is used in such environment.

Emission test Compliance Electromagnetic environment – guidance

RF emissions Group1 The monitor uses RF energy only for its internal
function. Therefore, its RF emissions are very low
CISPR11
and are not likely to cause any interference in
nearby electronic equipment.
Class A
RF emission

CISPR 11 The monitor is suitable for use in all establishments

Harmonic emissions other than domestic and those directly connected to
Class A
the public low-voltage power supply network that
IEC 61000-3-2
supplies building used for domestic purposes.
Voltage fluctuations /
Complies
flicker emissions

29
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

IEC 61000-3-3
If the system is operated within the electromagnetic environment listed in Table
Guidance and Declaration – Electromagnetic Immunity, the system will remain safe and
provide the following essential performance:
 Operating mode
 Accuracy
 Function
 Accessories identification
 Date stored
 Alarm
 Detect for connection
 Parameter

Table 2
Guidance and manufacture’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity
The monitor is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or
the user of monitor should assure that it is used in such an environment.

Immunity test IEC60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment

– guidance
Electrostatic ±8 kV contact ±8 kV contact Floors should be wood,
discharge ±15 kV air ±15 kV air concrete or ceramic tile. If
(ESD) floors are covered with
IEC 61000-4-2 synthetic material, the
relative humidity should be
at least 30%.

Electrical fast 2 kV for power 2kV for power Mains power quality should
transient/burst supply lines supply lines be that of a typical
IEC 61000-4-4 1 kV for input/output 1 kV for commercial or hospital

lines input/output lines environment.

±1 kV line(s) to ±1 kV line(s) to
Surge
line(s) line(s)
IEC 61000-4-5
±2 kV line(s) to earth ±2 kV line(s) to
earth

30
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Mains power quality should

Voltage dips, 0 % UT; 0.5 cycle At 0 % UT; 0.5 cycle
be that of a typical
short 0°, 45°, 90°, 135°, At 0°, 45°, 90°,
commercial or hospital
interruptions 180°, 225°, 270°and 135°, 180°, 225°,
environment. If the user of
and voltage 315° 270°and 315°
the monitor requires
variations on
continued operation during
power supply
0 % UT; 1 cycle and 0 % UT; 1 cycle and power mains interruptions, it
input lines
70 % UT; 25/30 70 % UT; 25/30 is recommended that the
IEC monitor be powered from an
cycles cycles
61000-4-11 uninterruptible power supply
Single phase: at 0° Single phase: at 0°
or a battery.

0 % UT; 250/300 0 % UT; 250/300

cycles cycles
Power frequency magnetic
Power
fields should be at levels
frequency
characteristic of a typical
(50/60 Hz) 30A/m 30A/m
location in a typical
magnetic field commercial or hospital

IEC 61000-4-8 environment.

NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.

Table 3
Guidance and manufacture’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity
The monitor is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or
the user of monitor should assure that it is used in such an environment.

Immunity test IEC 60601 Complianc Electromagnetic environment – guidance

test level e level

Conducted RF 3Vrms 3Vrms Portable and mobile RF communications

IEC 61000-4-6 150kHz～ equipment should be used no closer to
any part of the monitor including cables,
80MHz

31
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Radiated RF 3V/m 3V/m than the recommended separation

IEC 61000-4-3 distance calculated from the equation
80MHz～
applicable to the frequency of the
2.7GHz
transmitter.
Recommended separation distance:

 3.5 
d  P 150 KHz to 80 MHz
V 1 

 3.5 
d   P 80 MHz～800 MHz
 E1 

 7  80MHz～2.7GHz
d   P
 E1 
Where P is the maximum output power
rating of the transmitter in watts (W)
according to the transmitter manufacturer
and d is the recommended separation
distance in metres (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters,
as determined by an electromagnetic site
survey,a should be less than the compliance
level in each frequency range.b
Interference may occur in the vicinity of
equipment marked with the following
symbol:

NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by
absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
Note 3: The device that intentionally receives RF electromagnetic energy at the exclusion band
(2400-2483.5MHz) is exempt from the ESSENTIAL PERFORMANCE requirements, but remains
safe.

32
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual
a
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless)
telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV
broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic
environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered.
If the measured field strength in the location in which the monitor is used exceeds the
applicable RF compliance level above, the monitor should be observed to verify normal
operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such
as re-orienting or relocating the monitor.
b
Over the frequency range 0.15 MHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.

Table 4
Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF communications
equipment and the monitor
The monitor is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances
are controlled. The customer or the user of the monitor can help prevent electromagnetic interference
by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment
(transmitters) and the monitor.
Rated Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter
maximum
150kHz～80MHz 80MHz～800MHz 80 MHz～2.7 GHz
output power of
transmitter (w) d = 1.2 P d = 1.2 P d = 2.3 P

0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23

0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73

1 1.20 1.20 2.30

10 3.80 3.80 7.30

100 12.00 12.00 23.00

For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation
distance d in metres (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to
the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected
by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.

33
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

B.2 The management compliance of Radio

RF Parameter
Radio frequency Operating frequency Modulation Transmission power
transmitter
WiFi 2.4GHz～2.495GHz DSSS and <20dBm (average value)
IEEE802.11a/b/g/n 5.15 GHz～5.35GHz OFDM <30dBm (Peak)

5.47 GHz～5.725GHz
5.725 GHz～5.82GHz

The radio module used in the device is complied with the essential requirements and
other relevant provisions of The Radio Equipment Directive.

WARNING:
 Keep a distance of at least 20 cm away from the monitor when WIFI function is
in use.

34
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Appendix C Default Settings

This chapter lists some important factory default settings for monitors. The user
cannot change the factory default settings, but the monitor can be restored to the factory
default settings when necessary.

C.1 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST, QT

C.1.1 ECG

Item Default Setting

HR Alarm switch ON
Alarm high limit 200 bpm
Alarm low limit 100 bpm
Alarm priority Med
Alarm output Off
Alarm source HR
ECG 1 II
ECG2 (5-lead, 6-lead, 12-lead) I
ECG Gain ×1
Waveform Speed 25 mm/s
Filter Mode Monitor
Notch Filter On
Lead type 3-lead
QRS volume 3
Paced Unspecified
Pacer Reject Off

C.1.2 Arrhythmia

Item Alarm switch Alarm priority Alarm output

Asystole ON HIGH OFF
Vent Fib/Tach ON HIGH OFF

35
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Item Alarm switch Alarm priority Alarm output

V-Tach ON HIGH OFF
Vent Brady ON HIGH OFF
Extreme Tachy ON HIGH OFF
Extreme Brady ON HIGH OFF
R on T OFF MED OFF
Tachy OFF MED OFF
Brady OFF MED OFF
Nonsustained V-Tach OFF MED OFF
Vent Rhythm OFF MED OFF
PNC OFF MED OFF
PNP OFF MED OFF
Pause OFF MED OFF
Pauses/min High OFF MED OFF
Run PVCs OFF MED OFF
Couplet OFF LOW OFF
Bigeminy OFF LOW OFF
Trigeminy OFF LOW OFF
Frequent PVCs OFF LOW OFF
PVC OFF LOW OFF
Missed Beat OFF LOW OFF
A-Fib OFF LOW OFF
A-Fib End OFF LOW OFF
ECG Noise OFF LOW OFF
Irregular Rhythm OFF LOW OFF
Irregular Rhythm End OFF LOW OFF

C.1.3 ST

Item Default Setting

ST-I, ST-II, Alarm switch ON

36
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Item Default Setting

ST-III, ST-aVR, Alarm high limit 0.2 mV
ST-aVL, Alarm low limit -0.2 mV
ST-aVF, ST-V1, Alarm priority MED
ST-V2, ST-V3, Alarm output OFF
ST-V4, ST-V5,
ST-V6, ST-Va,
ST-Vb
ST analysis OFF
ST marking line OFF
ST point automatic adjustment OFF
ST Point J + 60 ms
ISO Point -80 ms
J Point 48 ms

C.1.4 QT

Item Default Setting

QTc Alarm switch OFF
Alarm high limit Big animal:500
Small animal:460
Alarm priority MED
Alarm output OFF
ΔQTc Alarm switch OFF
Alarm high limit 60
Alarm priority MED
Alarm output OFF
QT analysis OFF

37
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

C.2 RESP

Item Default Setting

RR Alarm switch ON
High limit 100
Low limit 30
Alarm priority MED
Alarm output OFF
Apnea Alarm switch ON
Alarm priority HIGH, unadjustable
Alarm output OFF
Apnea Delay 20 s
RR Source Auto
Resp Lead RA_LL
Gain ×1
Waveform Speed 6.25 mm/s
Auto Threshold Detection ON
Respiratory anti-drift ON

C.3 SpO2

Item Default Setting

SpO2 Alarm switch ON
High limit 95％
Low limit 90％
Alarm priority MED
Alarm output OFF
Desat Alarm switch ON
Low limit 80％
Alarm priority HIGH
Alarm output OFF

38
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Item Default Setting

NIBP Simul OFF
Sensitivity MED
Display PI ON
Waveform Speed 25 mm/s
PR Alarm switch ON
High limit 200 bpm
Low limit 100 bpm
Alarm priority MED
Alarm output OFF
Alarm source HR
PR source Auto
QRS volume 3
Tone modulation ON

C.4 TEMP

Item Default Setting

T1, T2 Alarm switch ON
High limit 38.0 ºC
Low limit 35.0 ºC
Alarm priority MED
Alarm output OFF
ΔT Alarm switch ON
High limit 2.0 ºC
Alarm priority MED
Alarm output OFF
Unit ºC

39
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

C.5 NIBP

Item Default Setting

NIBP-S Alarm switch ON
High limit Big animal: 160 mmHg
Small animal: 90 mmHg
Low limit Big animal: 90 mmHg
Small animal: 40 mmHg
Alarm priority MED
Alarm output OFF
NIBP-D Alarm switch ON
High limit Big animal: 90 mmHg
Small animal: 60 mmHg
Low limit Big animal: 50 mmHg
Small animal : 20 mmHg
Alarm priority MED
Alarm output OFF
NIBP-M Alarm switch ON
High limit Big animal: 110 mmHg
Small animal: 70 mmHg
Low limit Big animal: 60 mmHg
Small animal: 25 mmHg
Alarm priority MED
Alarm output OFF
NIBP-sdp Alarm switch ON
High limit 60mmHg
Low limit 20mmHg
Alarm priority MED
Alarm output OFF
Initial pressure 160 mmHg
Interval manual
Start Mode Clock

40
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Item Default Setting

NIBP End tone OFF
Auxiliary venipuncture pressure Big animal: 80mmHg
Small animal: 40mmHg
Unit mmHg

C.6 IBP

Item Default Setting

IBP-S Alarm switch ON
High limit ART/Ao/UAP/BAP/FAP/LV/P1/P2 arterial pressure: 90
mmHg
PA/PAWP: 60mmHg
Low limit ART/Ao/UAP/BAP/FAP/LV/P1/P2 arterial pressure: 55
mmHg
PA/PAWP: 24 mmHg
Alarm priority MED
Alarm output OFF
IBP-D Alarm switch ON
High limit ART/Ao/UAP/BAP/FAP/LV/P1/P2 arterial pressure:
60mmHg
PA/PAWP: 4 mmHg
Low limit ART/Ao/UAP/BAP/FAP/LV/P1/P2 arterial pressure: 20
mmHg
PA/PAWP: -4 mmHg
Alarm priority MED
Alarm output OFF
IBP-M Alarm switch ON
High limit ART/Ao/UAP/BAP/FAP/LV/P1/P2 arterial pressure: 70
mmHg
PA/PAWP: 26 mmHg
CVP/ICP/RAP/LAP/UVP Venous pressure: 4 mmHg

41
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Item Default Setting

Low limit ART/Ao/UAP/BAP/FAP/LV/P1/P2 arterial pressure: 35
mmHg
PA/PAWP: 12 mmHg
CVP/ICP/RAP/LAP/UVP venous pressure: 0 mmHg
Alarm priority MED
Alarm output OFF
CPP Alarm switch ON
High limit 90 mmHg
Low limit 30 mmHg
Alarm priority MED
Alarm output OFF
Unit ART/Ao/UAP/BAP/FAP/LV/RAP/LAP/UVP/PA/PAW
P/P1/P2: mmHg
CVP /ICP/CPP: cmH2O
Sensitivity MED
Waveform Speed 25 mm/s
Scale type Manual
Scale Upper scale ART /Ao/UAP/BAP/FAP/LV/P1/P2 arterial pressure:
160mmHg
CVP /ICP/RAP/LAP/UVP venous pressure : 20mmHg;
PA/PAWP：30mmHg
Lower scale 0mmHg
High-precision cursor OFF
switch
High-precision cursor ART/ Ao/ UAP/BAP/FAP/LV/P1/P2 arterial pressure:
80mmHg
CVP /ICP/RAP/LAP/UVP venous pressure: 10mmHg
PA/PAWP：15mmHg
PPV measurement OFF
PPV source Auto

42
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Item Default Setting

Waveform Left scale 0~160mmHg
overlay Right scale P1/P2: 0~160mmHg
settup CVP/RAP/LAP/ICP/UVP: 0 ~20 mmHg
Waveform 25 mm/s
speed
Gridlines OFF

C.7 C.O.

Item Default Setting

TB Alarm switch ON
High limit 39.0 ºC
Low limit 36.0 ºC
Alarm priority MED
Alarm output OFF
Measurement mode Single
TI source Manual
Injection volume 10cc
Catheter coefficient 0.564
Temperature Unit ºC

C.8 CO2

Item Default Setting

Et CO2 Alarm switch ON
High limit 45 mmHg
Low limit 30mmHg
Alarm MED
priority
Alarm output OFF
FiCO2 Alarm switch ON
High limit 4 mmHg

43
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Item Default Setting

Alarm MED
priority
Alarm output OFF
Apnea delay 20s
Waveform Speed 6.25 mm/s
Scale 50 mmHg
Waveform type Draw
Operating Mode Measurement mode
Unit mmHg
Gas temperature 35 ºC
Atmospheric 760mmHg
O2 compensation 16%
N2O compensation 0%
Zero gas Air
Anesthetics 0%
Balance Gas Air

C.9 DM

Item Default Setting

Unit Drops/min
Drops/mL 20

C.10 Alarm Default Settings

Item Default Setting

Alarm Volume 2
High Priority Alarm Alarm volume＋2
Volume
Reminder Volume 5
Apnea Delay 20s

44
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Item Default Setting

Alarm Record Duration 8s

C.11 Screen Setup

Item Default Setting

Screen Select Standard screen
Screen Lock Duration 2min
Brightness 5
Brightness On Battery 1

C.12 Color of parameters

Item Default Setting

ECG Green
NIBP White
SpO2 Yellow
TEMP Purple
RESP Cyan
CO2 White
DM Yellow-green
IBP Red
C.O. White

C.13 Recorder

Item Default Setting

Waveform 1 Ⅱ
Waveform 2 Pleth
Waveform 3 RR
Record Speed 25mm/s
Record Duration 8s
CyCle Record Interval OFF

45
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Item Default Setting

Cycle Record Duration 8s
Alarm Record Duration 8s
NIBP trigger OFF

C.14 Other

Item Default Setting

Keypad tone ON
Night Brightness 1
Mode Alarm volume 2
QRS volume 1
Touch Tone OFF
NIBP End OFF
Tone

C.15 Maintenance Item

Item Default Setting

Network Type LAN
LAN IP Use the following IP address
Frequency 2.4G
Device No. 8
Alarm Pause Duration 2min
Minimum alarm volume 2
Alarm sound ISO
High Alarm Interval (s) 10
Medium Alarm Interval (s) 20
Low Alarm Interval (s) 20
Reset Remote Bed’s Alarm OFF
Alarm Reset By Other Bed OFF
Alarm Off ON
Reminder Interval 5min

46
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Item Default Setting

ECG Lead Off Alarm Level MED
Alarm delay OFF
Notch filter 50 Hz
Nurse Signal type Pulse
call Trigger method N.O.
Alarm level All
Alarm type Technical Alarm & Physiological Alarm

47
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Appendix D Alarm Message

This chapter lists some of the most important physiological and technical alarm
information, and some alarm information may not be listed.

D.1 Physiological alarm

D.1.1 General physiological alarm

Alarm messages Default priority Cause and solution

The measured value of the corresponding
parameter is higher than the alarm high limit.
XX High MED Please check the patient’s physiological condition
and confirm whether the patient type and alarm
limit settings are applicable to the patient.
The measured value of the corresponding
parameter is lower than the alarm high limit.
XX Low MED Please check the patient’s physiological condition
and confirm whether the patient type and alarm
limit settings are applicable to the patient.
Note: XX represents the nominal name of physiological parameter, such as HR, ST, RR,
SpO2 or PR, etc.

D.1.2 Arrhythmia alarm information

Alarm messages Default priority Alarm messages Default priority

Asystole HIGH Pauses/min High MED
Vent Fib/Tach HIGH Run PVCs MED
V-Tach HIGH Couplet LOW
Vent Brady HIGH Bigeminy LOW
Extreme Tachy HIGH Trigeminy LOW
Extreme Brady HIGH Frequent PVCs LOW
R on T MED PVC LOW

48
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Alarm messages Default priority Alarm messages Default priority

Tachy MED Missed Beat LOW
Brady MED A-Fib LOW
Nonsustained V-Tach MED A-Fib End LOW
Vent Rhythm MED ECG Noise LOW
PNC MED Irregular Rhythm LOW
PNP MED Irregular Rhythm End LOW
Pause MED

D.1.3 RESP Physiological Alarm

Alarm messages Default priority Cause and solution

The patient is not breathing or the respiratory
signal is too weak to measure the respiratory
rate. Please check the patient’s condition,
RESP Apnea High
check whether the electrode plate is placed
correctly and whether the connection of
electrode plate, cable and lead wire is firm.
The patient’s heartbeat interferes with
breathing, thus making it impossible to
measure the breathing rate correctly. Please
RESP Artifact High
check the patient’s condition and check the
connection of electrode plates, cables and lead
wires.

D.1.4 SpO2 Physiological Alarm

Alarm messages Default priority Cause and solution

Can’t find a pulse for a long time. Please
SpO2 Search Pulse immediately check the patient’s condition. If
High
Timeout the patient is normal condition, please
replace placement position of blood oxygen

49
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Alarm messages Default priority Cause and solution

probe.
SpO2 measurement is below the desaturation
limit. Please check the patient’s status and
SpO2 Desat High
confirm whether the alarm limit setting is
applicable to the patient.

D.1.5 CO2 Physiological Alarm

Alarm messages Default priority Cause and solution

The patient is not breathing or the
respiratory signal is too weak to measure
CO2 Apnea High the respiratory rate. Check the patient’s
condition and whether the air circuit
connection is correct.

D.2 Technical Alarm

This chapter lists the main technical alarms, the level of technical alarms, the cleared
status of alarm reset alarm prompts, and the measures to be taken after the alarm occurs.
Some alarm messages may not be listed.
After different technical alarm is reset, the alarm prompt will be cleared to different
degrees. The following three types of technical alarms are given in this section according
to the status of alarm being cleared.
 Completely clear: the technical alarm is completely clear. The monitor has no
alarm indication.
 Sound and light can be cleared: the technical alarm displays as prompt
information.
 Not clearable: the sound of technical alarm is shielded.

50
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

D.2.1 General technical alarm

Default Alarm clear Cause and solution

Alarm messages
priority method
XX XX measurement module failure or
Communication Med Not clearable communication failure.
error
Note: “XX” represents the module name, such as ECG, SpO2, IBP, TEMP, etc.

D.2.2 ECG Technical Alarm

Default Alarm clear Cause and solution
Alarm messages
priority method
ECG Self-test Board failure. Please contact the
Med Not clearable
Error manufacturer for repair.
All ECG leads fall off or ECG cables
Sound and light are not connected. Please check the
ECG Leads Off Med
can be cleared connection of ECG electrode plates,
lead wires and cables.
The electrode is not firmly connected
with the patient or falls off, causing the
Sound and light
ECG XX Off Med corresponding ECG lead to fall off.
can be cleared
Please check the connection of ECG
electrode plates, lead wires and cables.
ECG electrode polarization or poor
ECG YY Sound and light
Low contact. Please check the connection of
Polarized can be cleared
ECG electrodes plates.
Relearn is triggered manually or
ECG Learning Prompt /
automatically
ECG Cable Use non-factory cables. Please replace
Med Not clearable
Incompatible the original cable.
ECG Cable Has ECG cable has expired. Please replace
Med Not clearable
Expired the cable.

51
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Default Alarm clear Cause and solution

Alarm messages
priority method
ECG Cable will ECG cable is about to expire. Please
Prompt /
expire soon replace the cable in time.
Pacing signal has been detected by
non-pacing patients. Please check
ECG Suspected
Prompt / whether the patients have pacemakers
Pacing Signal
and check the connection of ECG
electrode sheets.
Note: XX represents RA, LA, LL, RL, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6,
YY represents I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5 or V6.

D.2.3 RESP Technical Alarm

Default Alarm clear Cause and solution

Alarm messages
priority method
ECG lead-off or the ECG cable is not
Completely
RESP Leads Off Med connected. Check the communication of
clear
ECG electrode and lead wires.

D.2.4 SpO2 Technical Alarm

Default Alarm clear Cause and solution

Alarm messages
priority method
Board failure. Please contact the
SpO2 Self-test Error Med Not clearable
manufacturer for repair.
The SpO2 sensor is falled off from
the patient end. Check the
Sound and light
SpO2 Sensor Off Med connection of the sensor. If the
can be cleared
alarm still exists, replace the
sensor.

52
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

The SpO2 main cable falls off

from the module end or the
connection between the SpO2
SpO2 Sensor Sound and light sensor and the SpO2 main cable
Low
Disconnected can be cleared falls off. Confirm that SpO2 main
cable and sensor are connected
normally. If the alarm still cannot
be eliminated, replace the sensor.
SpO2 Low Low Not clearable PI<0.3% or signal quality <60.
Confidence
SpO2 Update Low Not clearable 25s SpO2 measurement data not
Timeout updated.
SpO2 Motion Low Not clearable Patients move too much, affecting
Interference measurement.
SpO2 Searching / SpO2 module is searching for
Prompt
Pulse pulse.
Non-factory SpO2 sensor are
SpO2 Sensor
Med Not clearable used. Please replace the original
Incompatible
sensor.
SpO2 Sensor Has SpO2 sensor has expired. Please
Med Not clearable
Expired replace the sensor.
SpO2 Sensor Will SpO2 sensor is about to expire.
Prompt /
Expire Soon Please replace the sensor in time.

D.2.5 TEMP Technical Alarm

Default Alarm clear Cause and solution

Alarm messages
priority method
TEMP Self-test Board failure. Please contact the
Med Not clearable
Error manufacturer for repair.
〈TEMP label〉 Completely Check the connection of the sensor and
Med
Sensor Off clear reconnect the sensor.

53
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

D.2.6 NIBP Technical Alarm

Default Alarm clear Cause and solution

Alarm messages
priority method
NIBP Self-test Board failure. Please contact the
Med Not clearable
Error manufacturer for repair.
NIBP System
Low Not clearable System operation failure.
Failure
NIBP Air Pressure Completely Pressure error, unable to maintain stable
Low
Error clear cuff pressure, such as tracheal knot.
NIBP air leakage was found in the
NIBP Completely
Low inspection. Please check the sleeve and
Air Leakage clear
airpipe for air leakage.
NIBP Air System Completely
Low Damaged cuff, hose or joint.
Leak clear
The cuff used does not match the patient
type set. Please confirm that the patient
type is set correctly and select correct
NIBP Cuff Type Completely
Low cuff according to the patient type. If the
Error clear
patient type and cuff selection are
correct, please check whether the airway
and airpipe are bent or blocked.
NIBP
Completely The pressure exceeds the specified
Overpressure Med
clear safety limit.
Detected
The cuff is not tight; Or the cuff is not
connected. Select the correct cuff
Completely
NIBP Loose Cuff Low according to the patient type, place the
clear
cuff according to the manual, and
connect the airpipe.
The patient moved frequently during the
NIBP Excessive Completely
Low measurement. Or violent movement
Motion clear
during measurement;

54
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Default Alarm clear Cause and solution

Alarm messages
priority method
Or irregular pulse rate, such as
arrhythmia.
NIBP Signal Completely
Low Great movement.
Saturated clear
The cuff is too loose or the patient’s
NIBP Weak Completely pulse is too weak. Please check the
Low
Signal clear patient’s condition or whether the cuff is
placed correctly.
NIBP Out of Completely The measurement range exceeds the
Low
Range clear specified upper limit.
Measurement time exceeds 120s. Please
check the patient’s condition and the
Completely
NIBP Time Out Low connection of accessories or replace the
clear
cuff, and conduct the measurement
again.
Three consecutive measurement failures
Completely occurred during periodic measurement.
NIBP Cycle Abort Low
clear Please check whether the patient’s
condition or cuff placement is correct.
At zero, the pressure is beyond the zero
NIBP Zero Failed Prompt /
range or the pressure is unstable.

D.2.7 IBP Technical Alarm

Default Alarm clear Cause and solution

Alarm messages
priority method
The board is failure. Please
IBP Self-test Error Med Not clearable
contact the factory for repair.
XX Sensor Off Med Completely clear The XX cable is off the monitor.
When the XX sensor is zeroed, the
XX Zero Failed Med Not clearable
sensor is not connected or the

55
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Default Alarm clear Cause and solution

Alarm messages
priority method
pressure is out of range or the
pressure is unstable.
The catheter is pulled out from the
XX Catheter Off HIGH Not clearable patient. Please check the
connection.
Zero Required Prompt / /
The IBP module is zeroing
Zero Succeed Prompt /
successful
Note: XX represents IBP labels, such as PA, CVP, FAP, P1, etc.

D.2.8 C.O. Technical Alarm

Default Alarm clear Cause and solution

Alarm messages
priority method
C.O. TB Self-test The board is failure. Please
Med Not clearable
Error contact the factory for repair.
C.O. TI Self-test The board is failure. Please
Med Not clearable
Error contact the factory for repair.
Check the sensor connection and
C.O. TB Sensor Off Med Completely clear
reconnect the sensor.
Check the sensor connection and
C.O. T1 Sensor Off Med Completely clear
reconnect the sensor.
When measuring manually, it do
C.O. Measure
Low Completely clear not inject for sustaining 20
Timeout
seconds.

D.2.9 CO2 Technical Alarm

Default Alarm clear Cause and solution

Alarm messages
priority method

56
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Default Alarm clear Cause and solution

Alarm messages
priority method
The CO2 sensor is detached from
CO2 Sensor Off Med Completely clear
the patient or monitor.
The measured data of CO2
CO2 Out of Range Low Not clearable module is out of range and needs
zero.
CO2 Zero Required Low Not clearable The sensor needs zero.
CO2 Sensor Over
Low Not clearable Check sensor.
Temp
The CO2 sensor was not
CO2 Compensation
Low Not clearable initialized. Set compensation and
Not Set
initialize.
The CO2 sensor is in sleep
mode. Please select the
CO2 Sleep Mode Prompt /
measurement mode, CO2 can
enter the working state.
The CO2 sampling tube is
blocked or damaged; The
CO2 Check Sampling sampling tube is kinked or
Low Not clearable
Line compacted; The exhaust pipe is
blocked. Check the sampling
tube.
CO2 Check Adapter Low Not clearable Reinstall the airway adapter.
CO2 Zero In The CO2 module is being
Prompt /
Progress… zeroed.
CO2 Sensor Warm up Prompt / The CO2 module is warming up.
CO2 Self-Test Prompt / Module initialization
Hardware or software errors,
CO2 Sensor Faulty, E* Low / contact after-sales personnel to
check maintenance.
CO2 Self-Test Error Low Not clearable Hardware errors, Replace sensor,

57
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Default Alarm clear Cause and solution

Alarm messages
priority method
if the problem cannot be solved,
please contact the after-sales
personnel to check the
maintenance.
CO2 Motor Speed Check whether the sampling tube
Low Not clearable
Error is blocked.
CO2 Factory Contact the after-sales personnel
Low Not clearable
Calibration lost to check the maintenance.
CO2 Sampling Line
Low Not clearable Check sampling line.
Clogged
CO2 No Sample Line Low Completely clear Check sampling line.
Hardware error, and contact the
CO2 Internal
Low Not clearable after-sales personnel to check the
Temp.Out of Range
maintenance.
CO2 Ambient Pressure Recalibrate atmospheric
Low Not clearable
Out of Range pressure.
CO2 Span Calibration Contact the after-sales personnel
Low Not clearable
Command Failed to check the maintenance.
CO2 Span Calibration
Prompt / Disappear after success.
in Progress…
CO2 Replace Adapter Low Not clearable Check adapter.
CO2 No Adapter Low Completely clear Check adapter.

D.2.10 DM Technical Alarm

Default Alarm clear Cause and solution

Alarm messages
priority method
The infusion container is empty
DM Finished Low Completely clear
and the infusion is complete.
DM Drip Speed Sound and light During infusion, the drip rate
Low
Abnormal can be cleared changes by more than 20%.

58
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

D.2.11 System Alarm

Default Alarm clear Cause and solution

Alarm messages
priority method
Please connect AC power supply for
Battery Low High Not clearable
power supply and charge the battery.
Battery Fault Prompt / Please replace the battery.
The recorder is not loaded with paper
or the recorder door is not closed.
Sound and light
Recorder No Paper Low Please check the recorder to make sure
can be cleared
the paper is loaded or the recorder door
is closed.
The recorder module is not plugged in.
Recorder Not Exist Prompt /
please insert the recorder module.
The recorder works too long. Please
Recorder Too Hot Low Not clearable restart the recording task after the
recorder head cools down.
The monitor is disconnected from the
Completely
CMS Disconnected Med CMS. Please check the network
clear
connection.
The storage space of the monitor is full.
Disk Full Med Not clearable Please clear the patient related data in
time.
The storage space of the monitor is
Sound and light
Disk Will Be Full Low almost full. Please clear the patient
can be cleared
related data.

59
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Appendix E Cybersecurity
This chapter mainly describes the information related to cybersecurity of the
monitor.

E.1 Operating environment

 Hardware environment
 Monitor software is only applicable to S12 Vet monitor hardware
platform.
 Screen: 12.1″ LCD screens with 4:3 aspect ratio and 800*600 resolution.
 Peripherals: nurse call module, recorder.
 Software environment
 Main board: S12MB
 Operating system: Linux-3.2.0 kernel + Busybox filesystem.
 Database: sqlite-3.16.2
 Network environment
 Apply to LAN

E.2 Network data interface

The communication interface between the monitor and the CMS is wired or wireless
Ethernet, using the standard TCP/IP protocol family, and the application layer data format
follows the Central Monitoring System Network Communication Protocol during
transmission.

E.3 User access control mechanism

a） User identification method: after entering the authorization password, you

have the corresponding user type setting authority.
b） User types: medical personnel, hospital equipment maintenance personnel,
factory maintenance personnel.
c） User authority:
1 ） Authority of medical staff: No password. Automatically enter the
monitoring interface after starting up, and can be routinely set as required.

60
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

2 ） Authority of hospital equipment maintenance personnel: Enter the

maintenance menu by entering the hospital maintenance password, and at least have
settings for language configuration, automatic clearing of NIBP results, automatic
release of waveform freezing time and alarm related contents.
3）Manufacturer’s authority: Enter the maintenance menu by entering the
manufacturer’s maintenance password. In addition to the contents that can be set by
the authority of hospital equipment maintenance personnel, the manufacturer can at
least set the power frequency and module configuration.

E.4 Software Environment

 The list of system software is as follows:

Software name Version
Linux V3.2.0

 The supporting software is as follows:

Software name Version
Sqlit3 V3.16.2

 The list of application software is as follows:

Software name Supplier
S12 Vet monitor Guangdong Biolight Meditech Co., Ltd.
software

61
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Appendix F Terminology and Definitions

F.1 List of units

Abbreviation Full name

µA microampere
µV microvolt
µs microsecond
A ampere
Ah ampere hour
bpm beat per minute
bps bit per second
ºC centigrade
cc cubic centimeter
cm centimeter
dB decibel
DS dyne second
ºF fahrenheit
g gram
GHz gigahertz
GTT gutta
h hour
Hz hertz
in inch
k kilo
kg kilogram
kPa kilopascal
L litre
lb pound
m meter
mAh milliampere hour
Mb mega byte

62
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Abbreviation Full name

mcg microgram
mEq milli-equivalents
mg milligram
min minute
mL milliliter
mm millimeter
mmHg millimetes of mercury
cmH2O centimeters of water
ms millisecond
mV millivolt
mW milliwatt
MΩ megaohm
nm nanometer
rpm breaths per minute
s second
V volt
VA volt ampere
Ω ohm
W watt

F.2 Symbol list

Symbol Explanation
－ Minus
– Negative
％ Percent
/ Per; Divide;Or
～ To
＋ Plus
＝ Equal to
＜ Less than

63
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

＞ Greater than
≤ Less than or equal to
≥ Greater than or equal to
± Plus or minus
× Multiply
© Copyright

F.3 Terminology list

Abbreviation Full name

Association for Advancement of Medical
AAMI
Instrumentation
AC Alternating current
ACI Acceleration index
AHA American Heart Association
ANSI American National Standard Institute
Ao Aortic pressure
aVF Left foot augmented lead
aVL Left arm augmented lead
aVR Right arm augmented lead
awRR Airway respiratory rate
BP Blood pressure
BPSK Binary phase shift keying
BSA Bodysurface area
BTPS Body temperature and pressures，aturated
CCU Cardiac (coronary) care unit
CE Conformité Européenne
CIS Clinical information system
International Special Committee on Radio
CISPR
Interference
CMOS Complementary metal oxide semiconductor

64
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Abbreviation Full name

CMS Central monitoring system
COHb Carboxyhemoglobin
CP Cardiopulmonary
DC Direct current
Dia Diastolic
DPI Dot per inch
DVI Digital video interface
ECG Electrocardiograph
EDV End-diastolic volume
EEC European Economic Community
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMG Electromyograph
EMI Electromagnetic interference
ESU Electrosurgical unit
FCC Federal Communication Commission
FDA Food and Drug Administration
FPGA Field programmable gate array
FV Flow-volume
Hb Hemoglobin
Hb-CO Carbon mono-xide hemoglobin
HbO2 Oxyhemoglobin
HIS Hospital information system
HR Heart rate
ICU Intensive care unit
ID Identification
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IP Internet protocol
LA Left arm
LAP Left atrial pressure

65
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Abbreviation Full name

Lat Lateral
LCD Liquid crystal display
LCW Left cardiac work
LCWI Left cardiac work index
LED Light emitting diode
LL Left leg
LVDS Low voltage differential signal
MDD Medical Device Directive
MetHb Methemoglobin
MRI Magnetic resonance imaging
N/A Not applied
N2 Nitrogen
N2O Nitrous oxide
NIBP Noninvasive blood pressure
O2 Oxygen
OR Operating room
oxyCRG Oxygen cardio-respirogram
Paw Airway pressure
PD Photodetector
Pleth Plethy smogram
PR Pulse rate
PVC Premature ventricular contraction
R Right
RA Right arm
RAM Random access memory
RAP Right atrial pressure
Rec Record, recording
RESP Respiration
RHb Reduced hemoglobin
RL Right leg

66
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Abbreviation Full name

RR Respiration rate
RSBI Rapid shallow breathing index
SaO2 Arterial oxygen saturation
SEF Spectral edge frequency
SFM Self-maintenance
SpO2 Arterial oxygen saturation from pulse oximetry
SQI Signal quality index
STR Systolic time ratio
Sync Synchronization
Sys Systolic pressure
Taxil Axillary temperature
TD Temperature difference
TEMP Temperature
TFC Thoracic fluid content
TFI Thoracic fluid index
TFT Thin-film technology
Toral Oral temperature
TP Total power
Trect Rectal temperature
UPS Uninterruptible power supply
USB Universal serial bus
VAC Volts alternating current
VEPT Volume of electrically participating tissue
VI Velocity index

67
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual

Appendix G Toxic and Harmful Substances or elements

Components Lead Mercury Cadmiu Hexavalent Polybrominat Polybrominat
Pb Hg m chromium ed biphenyls ed diphenyl
Cd Cr(VI) PBB ethers
PBDE
Host Shell ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(plastic
parts)
Label ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Internal ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
sheet
metal
EMI ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Gasket
Silicone ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Piece
Package Package ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
materials
General Adaptin ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
g piece
Power ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
cord
Battery Lithium ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
battery
Accessory ECG ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
accessor
y
SpO2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
accessor
y
TEMP ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
accessor
y
NIBP ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
accessor

68
 S12 Vet Monitor User’s Manual
y
CO2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
accessor
y
Stand Carts ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
stand
Wall ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
stand
○: It means that the content of the toxic and harmful substances in all homogeneous materials of the
component is below the limit specified in SJ/T11363-2006.
×: Indicates that the content of the toxic and harmful substances in at least one homogeneous material
of the component exceeds the limit requirements specified in SJ/T11363-2006.

69
Product name: Veterinary Monitor

Product model: S12 Vet

Manufacturer: Guangdong Biolight Meditech Co., Ltd.

Address: No.2 Innovation First Road, Technical Innovation Coast,

Hi-tech Zone, Zhuhai, P.R. China

Fax: 0756-3399919

Post code: 519085

Toll-free consultation hot line: 400-8818-233

PN：22-075-0022